1 \# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 \# Copyright 1996-2010 The NASM Authors - All Rights Reserved
4 \# See the file AUTHORS included with the NASM distribution for
5 \# the specific copyright holders.
7 \# Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
8 \# modification, are permitted provided that the following
11 \# * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
12 \# notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
13 \# * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
14 \# copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
15 \# disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
16 \# with the distribution.
18 \# THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
19 \# CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
20 \# INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
21 \# MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
22 \# DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
23 \# CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
24 \# SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
25 \# NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
26 \# LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
27 \# HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
28 \# CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
29 \# OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
30 \# EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
32 \# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
34 \# Source code to NASM documentation
36 \M{category}{Programming}
37 \M{title}{NASM - The Netwide Assembler}
39 \M{author}{The NASM Development Team}
40 \M{copyright_tail}{-- All Rights Reserved}
41 \M{license}{This document is redistributable under the license given in the file "LICENSE" distributed in the NASM archive.}
42 \M{summary}{This file documents NASM, the Netwide Assembler: an assembler targetting the Intel x86 series of processors, with portable source.}
45 \M{infotitle}{The Netwide Assembler for x86}
46 \M{epslogo}{nasmlogo.eps}
52 \IR{-MD} \c{-MD} option
53 \IR{-MF} \c{-MF} option
54 \IR{-MG} \c{-MG} option
55 \IR{-MP} \c{-MP} option
56 \IR{-MQ} \c{-MQ} option
57 \IR{-MT} \c{-MT} option
78 \IR{!=} \c{!=} operator
79 \IR{$, here} \c{$}, Here token
80 \IR{$, prefix} \c{$}, prefix
83 \IR{%%} \c{%%} operator
84 \IR{%+1} \c{%+1} and \c{%-1} syntax
86 \IR{%0} \c{%0} parameter count
88 \IR{&&} \c{&&} operator
90 \IR{..@} \c{..@} symbol prefix
92 \IR{//} \c{//} operator
94 \IR{<<} \c{<<} operator
95 \IR{<=} \c{<=} operator
96 \IR{<>} \c{<>} operator
98 \IR{==} \c{==} operator
100 \IR{>=} \c{>=} operator
101 \IR{>>} \c{>>} operator
102 \IR{?} \c{?} MASM syntax
103 \IR{^} \c{^} operator
104 \IR{^^} \c{^^} operator
105 \IR{|} \c{|} operator
106 \IR{||} \c{||} operator
107 \IR{~} \c{~} operator
108 \IR{%$} \c{%$} and \c{%$$} prefixes
110 \IR{+ opaddition} \c{+} operator, binary
111 \IR{+ opunary} \c{+} operator, unary
112 \IR{+ modifier} \c{+} modifier
113 \IR{- opsubtraction} \c{-} operator, binary
114 \IR{- opunary} \c{-} operator, unary
115 \IR{! opunary} \c{!} operator, unary
116 \IR{alignment, in bin sections} alignment, in \c{bin} sections
117 \IR{alignment, in elf sections} alignment, in \c{elf} sections
118 \IR{alignment, in win32 sections} alignment, in \c{win32} sections
119 \IR{alignment, of elf common variables} alignment, of \c{elf} common
121 \IR{alignment, in obj sections} alignment, in \c{obj} sections
122 \IR{a.out, bsd version} \c{a.out}, BSD version
123 \IR{a.out, linux version} \c{a.out}, Linux version
124 \IR{autoconf} Autoconf
126 \IR{bitwise and} bitwise AND
127 \IR{bitwise or} bitwise OR
128 \IR{bitwise xor} bitwise XOR
129 \IR{block ifs} block IFs
130 \IR{borland pascal} Borland, Pascal
131 \IR{borland's win32 compilers} Borland, Win32 compilers
132 \IR{braces, after % sign} braces, after \c{%} sign
134 \IR{c calling convention} C calling convention
135 \IR{c symbol names} C symbol names
136 \IA{critical expressions}{critical expression}
137 \IA{command line}{command-line}
138 \IA{case sensitivity}{case sensitive}
139 \IA{case-sensitive}{case sensitive}
140 \IA{case-insensitive}{case sensitive}
141 \IA{character constants}{character constant}
142 \IR{common object file format} Common Object File Format
143 \IR{common variables, alignment in elf} common variables, alignment
145 \IR{common, elf extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{elf} extensions to
146 \IR{common, obj extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{obj} extensions to
147 \IR{declaring structure} declaring structures
148 \IR{default-wrt mechanism} default-\c{WRT} mechanism
151 \IR{dll symbols, exporting} DLL symbols, exporting
152 \IR{dll symbols, importing} DLL symbols, importing
154 \IR{dos archive} DOS archive
155 \IR{dos source archive} DOS source archive
156 \IA{effective address}{effective addresses}
157 \IA{effective-address}{effective addresses}
159 \IR{elf, 16-bit code and} ELF, 16-bit code and
160 \IR{elf shared libraries} ELF, shared libraries
163 \IR{executable and linkable format} Executable and Linkable Format
164 \IR{extern, obj extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{obj} extensions to
165 \IR{extern, rdf extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{rdf} extensions to
166 \IR{floating-point, constants} floating-point, constants
167 \IR{floating-point, packed bcd constants} floating-point, packed BCD constants
169 \IR{freelink} FreeLink
170 \IR{functions, c calling convention} functions, C calling convention
171 \IR{functions, pascal calling convention} functions, Pascal calling
173 \IR{global, aoutb extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{aoutb} extensions to
174 \IR{global, elf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{elf} extensions to
175 \IR{global, rdf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{rdf} extensions to
177 \IR{got relocations} \c{GOT} relocations
178 \IR{gotoff relocation} \c{GOTOFF} relocations
179 \IR{gotpc relocation} \c{GOTPC} relocations
180 \IR{intel number formats} Intel number formats
181 \IR{linux, elf} Linux, ELF
182 \IR{linux, a.out} Linux, \c{a.out}
183 \IR{linux, as86} Linux, \c{as86}
184 \IR{logical and} logical AND
185 \IR{logical or} logical OR
186 \IR{logical xor} logical XOR
187 \IR{mach object file format} Mach, object file format
189 \IR{macho32} \c{macho32}
190 \IR{macho64} \c{macho64}
193 \IA{memory reference}{memory references}
195 \IA{misc directory}{misc subdirectory}
196 \IR{misc subdirectory} \c{misc} subdirectory
197 \IR{microsoft omf} Microsoft OMF
198 \IR{mmx registers} MMX registers
199 \IA{modr/m}{modr/m byte}
200 \IR{modr/m byte} ModR/M byte
202 \IR{ms-dos device drivers} MS-DOS device drivers
203 \IR{multipush} \c{multipush} macro
205 \IR{nasm version} NASM version
209 \IR{operating system} operating system
211 \IR{pascal calling convention}Pascal calling convention
212 \IR{passes} passes, assembly
217 \IR{plt} \c{PLT} relocations
218 \IA{pre-defining macros}{pre-define}
219 \IA{preprocessor expressions}{preprocessor, expressions}
220 \IA{preprocessor loops}{preprocessor, loops}
221 \IA{preprocessor variables}{preprocessor, variables}
222 \IA{rdoff subdirectory}{rdoff}
223 \IR{rdoff} \c{rdoff} subdirectory
224 \IR{relocatable dynamic object file format} Relocatable Dynamic
226 \IR{relocations, pic-specific} relocations, PIC-specific
227 \IA{repeating}{repeating code}
228 \IR{section alignment, in elf} section alignment, in \c{elf}
229 \IR{section alignment, in bin} section alignment, in \c{bin}
230 \IR{section alignment, in obj} section alignment, in \c{obj}
231 \IR{section alignment, in win32} section alignment, in \c{win32}
232 \IR{section, elf extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{elf} extensions to
233 \IR{section, win32 extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{win32} extensions to
234 \IR{segment alignment, in bin} segment alignment, in \c{bin}
235 \IR{segment alignment, in obj} segment alignment, in \c{obj}
236 \IR{segment, obj extensions to} \c{SEGMENT}, \c{elf} extensions to
237 \IR{segment names, borland pascal} segment names, Borland Pascal
238 \IR{shift command} \c{shift} command
240 \IR{sib byte} SIB byte
241 \IR{align, smart} \c{ALIGN}, smart
242 \IA{sectalign}{sectalign}
243 \IR{solaris x86} Solaris x86
244 \IA{standard section names}{standardized section names}
245 \IR{symbols, exporting from dlls} symbols, exporting from DLLs
246 \IR{symbols, importing from dlls} symbols, importing from DLLs
247 \IR{test subdirectory} \c{test} subdirectory
249 \IR{underscore, in c symbols} underscore, in C symbols
255 \IA{sco unix}{unix, sco}
256 \IR{unix, sco} Unix, SCO
257 \IA{unix source archive}{unix, source archive}
258 \IR{unix, source archive} Unix, source archive
259 \IA{unix system v}{unix, system v}
260 \IR{unix, system v} Unix, System V
261 \IR{unixware} UnixWare
263 \IR{version number of nasm} version number of NASM
264 \IR{visual c++} Visual C++
265 \IR{www page} WWW page
269 \IR{windows 95} Windows 95
270 \IR{windows nt} Windows NT
271 \# \IC{program entry point}{entry point, program}
272 \# \IC{program entry point}{start point, program}
273 \# \IC{MS-DOS device drivers}{device drivers, MS-DOS}
274 \# \IC{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}{32-bit mode, versus 16-bit mode}
275 \# \IC{c symbol names}{symbol names, in C}
278 \C{intro} Introduction
280 \H{whatsnasm} What Is NASM?
282 The Netwide Assembler, NASM, is an 80x86 and x86-64 assembler designed
283 for portability and modularity. It supports a range of object file
284 formats, including Linux and \c{*BSD} \c{a.out}, \c{ELF}, \c{COFF},
285 \c{Mach-O}, Microsoft 16-bit \c{OBJ}, \c{Win32} and \c{Win64}. It will
286 also output plain binary files. Its syntax is designed to be simple
287 and easy to understand, similar to Intel's but less complex. It
288 supports all currently known x86 architectural extensions, and has
289 strong support for macros.
292 \S{yaasm} Why Yet Another Assembler?
294 The Netwide Assembler grew out of an idea on \i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86}
295 (or possibly \i\c{alt.lang.asm} - I forget which), which was
296 essentially that there didn't seem to be a good \e{free} x86-series
297 assembler around, and that maybe someone ought to write one.
299 \b \i\c{a86} is good, but not free, and in particular you don't get any
300 32-bit capability until you pay. It's DOS only, too.
302 \b \i\c{gas} is free, and ports over to DOS and Unix, but it's not
303 very good, since it's designed to be a back end to \i\c{gcc}, which
304 always feeds it correct code. So its error checking is minimal. Also,
305 its syntax is horrible, from the point of view of anyone trying to
306 actually \e{write} anything in it. Plus you can't write 16-bit code in
309 \b \i\c{as86} is specific to Minix and Linux, and (my version at least)
310 doesn't seem to have much (or any) documentation.
312 \b \i\c{MASM} isn't very good, and it's (was) expensive, and it runs only under
315 \b \i\c{TASM} is better, but still strives for MASM compatibility,
316 which means millions of directives and tons of red tape. And its syntax
317 is essentially MASM's, with the contradictions and quirks that
318 entails (although it sorts out some of those by means of Ideal mode.)
319 It's expensive too. And it's DOS-only.
321 So here, for your coding pleasure, is NASM. At present it's
322 still in prototype stage - we don't promise that it can outperform
323 any of these assemblers. But please, \e{please} send us bug reports,
324 fixes, helpful information, and anything else you can get your hands
325 on (and thanks to the many people who've done this already! You all
326 know who you are), and we'll improve it out of all recognition.
330 \S{legal} \i{License} Conditions
332 Please see the file \c{LICENSE}, supplied as part of any NASM
333 distribution archive, for the license conditions under which you may
334 use NASM. NASM is now under the so-called 2-clause BSD license, also
335 known as the simplified BSD license.
337 Copyright 1996-2010 the NASM Authors - All rights reserved.
339 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
340 modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
343 \b Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
344 notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
346 \b Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
347 notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
348 documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
350 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
351 CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
352 INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
353 MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
354 DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
355 CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
356 SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
357 NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
358 LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
359 HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
360 CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
361 OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
362 EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
365 \H{contact} Contact Information
367 The current version of NASM (since about 0.98.08) is maintained by a
368 team of developers, accessible through the \c{nasm-devel} mailing list
369 (see below for the link).
370 If you want to report a bug, please read \k{bugs} first.
372 NASM has a \i{website} at
373 \W{http://www.nasm.us/}\c{http://www.nasm.us/}. If it's not there,
376 \i{New releases}, \i{release candidates}, and \I{snapshots, daily
377 development}\i{daily development snapshots} of NASM are available from
378 the official web site.
380 Announcements are posted to
381 \W{news:comp.lang.asm.x86}\i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86},
383 \W{http://www.freshmeat.net/}\c{http://www.freshmeat.net/}.
385 If you want information about the current development status, please
386 subscribe to the \i\c{nasm-devel} email list; see link from the
390 \H{install} Installation
392 \S{instdos} \i{Installing} NASM under MS-\i{DOS} or Windows
394 Once you've obtained the appropriate archive for NASM,
395 \i\c{nasm-XXX-dos.zip} or \i\c{nasm-XXX-win32.zip} (where \c{XXX}
396 denotes the version number of NASM contained in the archive), unpack
397 it into its own directory (for example \c{c:\\nasm}).
399 The archive will contain a set of executable files: the NASM
400 executable file \i\c{nasm.exe}, the NDISASM executable file
401 \i\c{ndisasm.exe}, and possibly additional utilities to handle the
404 The only file NASM needs to run is its own executable, so copy
405 \c{nasm.exe} to a directory on your PATH, or alternatively edit
406 \i\c{autoexec.bat} to add the \c{nasm} directory to your
407 \i\c{PATH} (to do that under Windows XP, go to Start > Control Panel >
408 System > Advanced > Environment Variables; these instructions may work
409 under other versions of Windows as well.)
411 That's it - NASM is installed. You don't need the nasm directory
412 to be present to run NASM (unless you've added it to your \c{PATH}),
413 so you can delete it if you need to save space; however, you may
414 want to keep the documentation or test programs.
416 If you've downloaded the \i{DOS source archive}, \i\c{nasm-XXX.zip},
417 the \c{nasm} directory will also contain the full NASM \i{source
418 code}, and a selection of \i{Makefiles} you can (hopefully) use to
419 rebuild your copy of NASM from scratch. See the file \c{INSTALL} in
422 Note that a number of files are generated from other files by Perl
423 scripts. Although the NASM source distribution includes these
424 generated files, you will need to rebuild them (and hence, will need a
425 Perl interpreter) if you change insns.dat, standard.mac or the
426 documentation. It is possible future source distributions may not
427 include these files at all. Ports of \i{Perl} for a variety of
428 platforms, including DOS and Windows, are available from
429 \W{http://www.cpan.org/ports/}\i{www.cpan.org}.
432 \S{instdos} Installing NASM under \i{Unix}
434 Once you've obtained the \i{Unix source archive} for NASM,
435 \i\c{nasm-XXX.tar.gz} (where \c{XXX} denotes the version number of
436 NASM contained in the archive), unpack it into a directory such
437 as \c{/usr/local/src}. The archive, when unpacked, will create its
438 own subdirectory \c{nasm-XXX}.
440 NASM is an \I{Autoconf}\I\c{configure}auto-configuring package: once
441 you've unpacked it, \c{cd} to the directory it's been unpacked into
442 and type \c{./configure}. This shell script will find the best C
443 compiler to use for building NASM and set up \i{Makefiles}
446 Once NASM has auto-configured, you can type \i\c{make} to build the
447 \c{nasm} and \c{ndisasm} binaries, and then \c{make install} to
448 install them in \c{/usr/local/bin} and install the \i{man pages}
449 \i\c{nasm.1} and \i\c{ndisasm.1} in \c{/usr/local/man/man1}.
450 Alternatively, you can give options such as \c{--prefix} to the
451 configure script (see the file \i\c{INSTALL} for more details), or
452 install the programs yourself.
454 NASM also comes with a set of utilities for handling the \c{RDOFF}
455 custom object-file format, which are in the \i\c{rdoff} subdirectory
456 of the NASM archive. You can build these with \c{make rdf} and
457 install them with \c{make rdf_install}, if you want them.
460 \C{running} Running NASM
462 \H{syntax} NASM \i{Command-Line} Syntax
464 To assemble a file, you issue a command of the form
466 \c nasm -f <format> <filename> [-o <output>]
470 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm
472 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into an \c{ELF} object file \c{myfile.o}. And
474 \c nasm -f bin myfile.asm -o myfile.com
476 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into a raw binary file \c{myfile.com}.
478 To produce a listing file, with the hex codes output from NASM
479 displayed on the left of the original sources, use the \c{-l} option
480 to give a listing file name, for example:
482 \c nasm -f coff myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
484 To get further usage instructions from NASM, try typing
488 As \c{-hf}, this will also list the available output file formats, and what they
491 If you use Linux but aren't sure whether your system is \c{a.out}
496 (in the directory in which you put the NASM binary when you
497 installed it). If it says something like
499 \c nasm: ELF 32-bit LSB executable i386 (386 and up) Version 1
501 then your system is \c{ELF}, and you should use the option \c{-f elf}
502 when you want NASM to produce Linux object files. If it says
504 \c nasm: Linux/i386 demand-paged executable (QMAGIC)
506 or something similar, your system is \c{a.out}, and you should use
507 \c{-f aout} instead (Linux \c{a.out} systems have long been obsolete,
508 and are rare these days.)
510 Like Unix compilers and assemblers, NASM is silent unless it
511 goes wrong: you won't see any output at all, unless it gives error
515 \S{opt-o} The \i\c{-o} Option: Specifying the Output File Name
517 NASM will normally choose the name of your output file for you;
518 precisely how it does this is dependent on the object file format.
519 For Microsoft object file formats (\c{obj}, \c{win32} and \c{win64}),
520 it will remove the \c{.asm} \i{extension} (or whatever extension you
521 like to use - NASM doesn't care) from your source file name and
522 substitute \c{.obj}. For Unix object file formats (\c{aout}, \c{as86},
523 \c{coff}, \c{elf32}, \c{elf64}, \c{ieee}, \c{macho32} and \c{macho64})
524 it will substitute \c{.o}. For \c{dbg}, \c{rdf}, \c{ith} and \c{srec},
525 it will use \c{.dbg}, \c{.rdf}, \c{.ith} and \c{.srec}, respectively,
526 and for the \c{bin} format it will simply remove the extension, so
527 that \c{myfile.asm} produces the output file \c{myfile}.
529 If the output file already exists, NASM will overwrite it, unless it
530 has the same name as the input file, in which case it will give a
531 warning and use \i\c{nasm.out} as the output file name instead.
533 For situations in which this behaviour is unacceptable, NASM
534 provides the \c{-o} command-line option, which allows you to specify
535 your desired output file name. You invoke \c{-o} by following it
536 with the name you wish for the output file, either with or without
537 an intervening space. For example:
539 \c nasm -f bin program.asm -o program.com
540 \c nasm -f bin driver.asm -odriver.sys
542 Note that this is a small o, and is different from a capital O , which
543 is used to specify the number of optimisation passes required. See \k{opt-O}.
546 \S{opt-f} The \i\c{-f} Option: Specifying the \i{Output File Format}
548 If you do not supply the \c{-f} option to NASM, it will choose an
549 output file format for you itself. In the distribution versions of
550 NASM, the default is always \i\c{bin}; if you've compiled your own
551 copy of NASM, you can redefine \i\c{OF_DEFAULT} at compile time and
552 choose what you want the default to be.
554 Like \c{-o}, the intervening space between \c{-f} and the output
555 file format is optional; so \c{-f elf} and \c{-felf} are both valid.
557 A complete list of the available output file formats can be given by
558 issuing the command \i\c{nasm -hf}.
561 \S{opt-l} The \i\c{-l} Option: Generating a \i{Listing File}
563 If you supply the \c{-l} option to NASM, followed (with the usual
564 optional space) by a file name, NASM will generate a
565 \i{source-listing file} for you, in which addresses and generated
566 code are listed on the left, and the actual source code, with
567 expansions of multi-line macros (except those which specifically
568 request no expansion in source listings: see \k{nolist}) on the
571 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
573 If a list file is selected, you may turn off listing for a
574 section of your source with \c{[list -]}, and turn it back on
575 with \c{[list +]}, (the default, obviously). There is no "user
576 form" (without the brackets). This can be used to list only
577 sections of interest, avoiding excessively long listings.
580 \S{opt-M} The \i\c{-M} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
582 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
583 This can be redirected to a file for further processing. For example:
585 \c nasm -M myfile.asm > myfile.dep
588 \S{opt-MG} The \i\c{-MG} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
590 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
591 This differs from the \c{-M} option in that if a nonexisting file is
592 encountered, it is assumed to be a generated file and is added to the
593 dependency list without a prefix.
596 \S{opt-MF} The \i\c\{-MF} Option: Set Makefile Dependency File
598 This option can be used with the \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options to send the
599 output to a file, rather than to stdout. For example:
601 \c nasm -M -MF myfile.dep myfile.asm
604 \S{opt-MD} The \i\c{-MD} Option: Assemble and Generate Dependencies
606 The \c{-MD} option acts as the combination of the \c{-M} and \c{-MF}
607 options (i.e. a filename has to be specified.) However, unlike the
608 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options, \c{-MD} does \e{not} inhibit the normal
609 operation of the assembler. Use this to automatically generate
610 updated dependencies with every assembly session. For example:
612 \c nasm -f elf -o myfile.o -MD myfile.dep myfile.asm
615 \S{opt-MT} The \i\c{-MT} Option: Dependency Target Name
617 The \c{-MT} option can be used to override the default name of the
618 dependency target. This is normally the same as the output filename,
619 specified by the \c{-o} option.
622 \S{opt-MQ} The \i\c{-MQ} Option: Dependency Target Name (Quoted)
624 The \c{-MQ} option acts as the \c{-MT} option, except it tries to
625 quote characters that have special meaning in Makefile syntax. This
626 is not foolproof, as not all characters with special meaning are
630 \S{opt-MP} The \i\c{-MP} Option: Emit phony targets
632 When used with any of the dependency generation options, the \c{-MP}
633 option causes NASM to emit a phony target without dependencies for
634 each header file. This prevents Make from complaining if a header
635 file has been removed.
638 \S{opt-F} The \i\c{-F} Option: Selecting a \i{Debug Information Format}
640 This option is used to select the format of the debug information
641 emitted into the output file, to be used by a debugger (or \e{will}
642 be). Prior to version 2.03.01, the use of this switch did \e{not} enable
643 output of the selected debug info format. Use \c{-g}, see \k{opt-g},
644 to enable output. Versions 2.03.01 and later automatically enable \c{-g}
645 if \c{-F} is specified.
647 A complete list of the available debug file formats for an output
648 format can be seen by issuing the command \c{nasm -f <format> -y}. Not
649 all output formats currently support debugging output. See \k{opt-y}.
651 This should not be confused with the \c{-f dbg} output format option which
652 is not built into NASM by default. For information on how
653 to enable it when building from the sources, see \k{dbgfmt}.
656 \S{opt-g} The \i\c{-g} Option: Enabling \i{Debug Information}.
658 This option can be used to generate debugging information in the specified
659 format. See \k{opt-F}. Using \c{-g} without \c{-F} results in emitting
660 debug info in the default format, if any, for the selected output format.
661 If no debug information is currently implemented in the selected output
662 format, \c{-g} is \e{silently ignored}.
665 \S{opt-X} The \i\c{-X} Option: Selecting an \i{Error Reporting Format}
667 This option can be used to select an error reporting format for any
668 error messages that might be produced by NASM.
670 Currently, two error reporting formats may be selected. They are
671 the \c{-Xvc} option and the \c{-Xgnu} option. The GNU format is
672 the default and looks like this:
674 \c filename.asm:65: error: specific error message
676 where \c{filename.asm} is the name of the source file in which the
677 error was detected, \c{65} is the source file line number on which
678 the error was detected, \c{error} is the severity of the error (this
679 could be \c{warning}), and \c{specific error message} is a more
680 detailed text message which should help pinpoint the exact problem.
682 The other format, specified by \c{-Xvc} is the style used by Microsoft
683 Visual C++ and some other programs. It looks like this:
685 \c filename.asm(65) : error: specific error message
687 where the only difference is that the line number is in parentheses
688 instead of being delimited by colons.
690 See also the \c{Visual C++} output format, \k{win32fmt}.
692 \S{opt-Z} The \i\c{-Z} Option: Send Errors to a File
694 Under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS} it can be difficult (though there are ways) to
695 redirect the standard-error output of a program to a file. Since
696 NASM usually produces its warning and \i{error messages} on
697 \i\c{stderr}, this can make it hard to capture the errors if (for
698 example) you want to load them into an editor.
700 NASM therefore provides the \c{-Z} option, taking a filename argument
701 which causes errors to be sent to the specified files rather than
702 standard error. Therefore you can \I{redirecting errors}redirect
703 the errors into a file by typing
705 \c nasm -Z myfile.err -f obj myfile.asm
707 In earlier versions of NASM, this option was called \c{-E}, but it was
708 changed since \c{-E} is an option conventionally used for
709 preprocessing only, with disastrous results. See \k{opt-E}.
711 \S{opt-s} The \i\c{-s} Option: Send Errors to \i\c{stdout}
713 The \c{-s} option redirects \i{error messages} to \c{stdout} rather
714 than \c{stderr}, so it can be redirected under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS}. To
715 assemble the file \c{myfile.asm} and pipe its output to the \c{more}
716 program, you can type:
718 \c nasm -s -f obj myfile.asm | more
720 See also the \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
723 \S{opt-i} The \i\c{-i}\I\c{-I} Option: Include File Search Directories
725 When NASM sees the \i\c{%include} or \i\c{%pathsearch} directive in a
726 source file (see \k{include}, \k{pathsearch} or \k{incbin}), it will
727 search for the given file not only in the current directory, but also
728 in any directories specified on the command line by the use of the
729 \c{-i} option. Therefore you can include files from a \i{macro
730 library}, for example, by typing
732 \c nasm -ic:\macrolib\ -f obj myfile.asm
734 (As usual, a space between \c{-i} and the path name is allowed, and
737 NASM, in the interests of complete source-code portability, does not
738 understand the file naming conventions of the OS it is running on;
739 the string you provide as an argument to the \c{-i} option will be
740 prepended exactly as written to the name of the include file.
741 Therefore the trailing backslash in the above example is necessary.
742 Under Unix, a trailing forward slash is similarly necessary.
744 (You can use this to your advantage, if you're really \i{perverse},
745 by noting that the option \c{-ifoo} will cause \c{%include "bar.i"}
746 to search for the file \c{foobar.i}...)
748 If you want to define a \e{standard} \i{include search path},
749 similar to \c{/usr/include} on Unix systems, you should place one or
750 more \c{-i} directives in the \c{NASMENV} environment variable (see
753 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
754 be specified as \c{-I}.
757 \S{opt-p} The \i\c{-p}\I\c{-P} Option: \I{pre-including files}Pre-Include a File
759 \I\c{%include}NASM allows you to specify files to be
760 \e{pre-included} into your source file, by the use of the \c{-p}
763 \c nasm myfile.asm -p myinc.inc
765 is equivalent to running \c{nasm myfile.asm} and placing the
766 directive \c{%include "myinc.inc"} at the start of the file.
768 For consistency with the \c{-I}, \c{-D} and \c{-U} options, this
769 option can also be specified as \c{-P}.
772 \S{opt-d} The \i\c{-d}\I\c{-D} Option: \I{pre-defining macros}Pre-Define a Macro
774 \I\c{%define}Just as the \c{-p} option gives an alternative to placing
775 \c{%include} directives at the start of a source file, the \c{-d}
776 option gives an alternative to placing a \c{%define} directive. You
779 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100
781 as an alternative to placing the directive
785 at the start of the file. You can miss off the macro value, as well:
786 the option \c{-dFOO} is equivalent to coding \c{%define FOO}. This
787 form of the directive may be useful for selecting \i{assembly-time
788 options} which are then tested using \c{%ifdef}, for example
791 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
792 be specified as \c{-D}.
795 \S{opt-u} The \i\c{-u}\I\c{-U} Option: \I{Undefining macros}Undefine a Macro
797 \I\c{%undef}The \c{-u} option undefines a macro that would otherwise
798 have been pre-defined, either automatically or by a \c{-p} or \c{-d}
799 option specified earlier on the command lines.
801 For example, the following command line:
803 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100 -uFOO
805 would result in \c{FOO} \e{not} being a predefined macro in the
806 program. This is useful to override options specified at a different
809 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
810 be specified as \c{-U}.
813 \S{opt-E} The \i\c{-E}\I{-e} Option: Preprocess Only
815 NASM allows the \i{preprocessor} to be run on its own, up to a
816 point. Using the \c{-E} option (which requires no arguments) will
817 cause NASM to preprocess its input file, expand all the macro
818 references, remove all the comments and preprocessor directives, and
819 print the resulting file on standard output (or save it to a file,
820 if the \c{-o} option is also used).
822 This option cannot be applied to programs which require the
823 preprocessor to evaluate \I{preprocessor expressions}\i{expressions}
824 which depend on the values of symbols: so code such as
826 \c %assign tablesize ($-tablestart)
828 will cause an error in \i{preprocess-only mode}.
830 For compatiblity with older version of NASM, this option can also be
831 written \c{-e}. \c{-E} in older versions of NASM was the equivalent
832 of the current \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
834 \S{opt-a} The \i\c{-a} Option: Don't Preprocess At All
836 If NASM is being used as the back end to a compiler, it might be
837 desirable to \I{suppressing preprocessing}suppress preprocessing
838 completely and assume the compiler has already done it, to save time
839 and increase compilation speeds. The \c{-a} option, requiring no
840 argument, instructs NASM to replace its powerful \i{preprocessor}
841 with a \i{stub preprocessor} which does nothing.
844 \S{opt-O} The \i\c{-O} Option: Specifying \i{Multipass Optimization}
846 NASM defaults to not optimizing operands which can fit into a signed byte.
847 This means that if you want the shortest possible object code,
848 you have to enable optimization.
850 Using the \c{-O} option, you can tell NASM to carry out different
851 levels of optimization. The syntax is:
853 \b \c{-O0}: No optimization. All operands take their long forms,
854 if a short form is not specified, except conditional jumps.
855 This is intended to match NASM 0.98 behavior.
857 \b \c{-O1}: Minimal optimization. As above, but immediate operands
858 which will fit in a signed byte are optimized,
859 unless the long form is specified. Conditional jumps default
860 to the long form unless otherwise specified.
862 \b \c{-Ox} (where \c{x} is the actual letter \c{x}): Multipass optimization.
863 Minimize branch offsets and signed immediate bytes,
864 overriding size specification unless the \c{strict} keyword
865 has been used (see \k{strict}). For compatability with earlier
866 releases, the letter \c{x} may also be any number greater than
867 one. This number has no effect on the actual number of passes.
869 The \c{-Ox} mode is recommended for most uses, and is the default
872 Note that this is a capital \c{O}, and is different from a small \c{o}, which
873 is used to specify the output file name. See \k{opt-o}.
876 \S{opt-t} The \i\c{-t} Option: Enable TASM Compatibility Mode
878 NASM includes a limited form of compatibility with Borland's \i\c{TASM}.
879 When NASM's \c{-t} option is used, the following changes are made:
881 \b local labels may be prefixed with \c{@@} instead of \c{.}
883 \b size override is supported within brackets. In TASM compatible mode,
884 a size override inside square brackets changes the size of the operand,
885 and not the address type of the operand as it does in NASM syntax. E.g.
886 \c{mov eax,[DWORD val]} is valid syntax in TASM compatibility mode.
887 Note that you lose the ability to override the default address type for
890 \b unprefixed forms of some directives supported (\c{arg}, \c{elif},
891 \c{else}, \c{endif}, \c{if}, \c{ifdef}, \c{ifdifi}, \c{ifndef},
892 \c{include}, \c{local})
894 \S{opt-w} The \i\c{-w} and \i\c{-W} Options: Enable or Disable Assembly \i{Warnings}
896 NASM can observe many conditions during the course of assembly which
897 are worth mentioning to the user, but not a sufficiently severe
898 error to justify NASM refusing to generate an output file. These
899 conditions are reported like errors, but come up with the word
900 `warning' before the message. Warnings do not prevent NASM from
901 generating an output file and returning a success status to the
904 Some conditions are even less severe than that: they are only
905 sometimes worth mentioning to the user. Therefore NASM supports the
906 \c{-w} command-line option, which enables or disables certain
907 classes of assembly warning. Such warning classes are described by a
908 name, for example \c{orphan-labels}; you can enable warnings of
909 this class by the command-line option \c{-w+orphan-labels} and
910 disable it by \c{-w-orphan-labels}.
912 The \i{suppressible warning} classes are:
914 \b \i\c{macro-params} covers warnings about \i{multi-line macros}
915 being invoked with the wrong number of parameters. This warning
916 class is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacover} for an example of why
917 you might want to disable it.
919 \b \i\c{macro-selfref} warns if a macro references itself. This
920 warning class is disabled by default.
922 \b\i\c{macro-defaults} warns when a macro has more default
923 parameters than optional parameters. This warning class
924 is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacdef} for why you might want to disable it.
926 \b \i\c{orphan-labels} covers warnings about source lines which
927 contain no instruction but define a label without a trailing colon.
928 NASM warns about this somewhat obscure condition by default;
929 see \k{syntax} for more information.
931 \b \i\c{number-overflow} covers warnings about numeric constants which
932 don't fit in 64 bits. This warning class is enabled by default.
934 \b \i\c{gnu-elf-extensions} warns if 8-bit or 16-bit relocations
935 are used in \c{-f elf} format. The GNU extensions allow this.
936 This warning class is disabled by default.
938 \b \i\c{float-overflow} warns about floating point overflow.
941 \b \i\c{float-denorm} warns about floating point denormals.
944 \b \i\c{float-underflow} warns about floating point underflow.
947 \b \i\c{float-toolong} warns about too many digits in floating-point numbers.
950 \b \i\c{user} controls \c{%warning} directives (see \k{pperror}).
953 \b \i\c{error} causes warnings to be treated as errors. Disabled by
956 \b \i\c{all} is an alias for \e{all} suppressible warning classes (not
957 including \c{error}). Thus, \c{-w+all} enables all available warnings.
959 In addition, you can set warning classes across sections.
960 Warning classes may be enabled with \i\c{[warning +warning-name]},
961 disabled with \i\c{[warning -warning-name]} or reset to their
962 original value with \i\c{[warning *warning-name]}. No "user form"
963 (without the brackets) exists.
965 Since version 2.00, NASM has also supported the gcc-like syntax
966 \c{-Wwarning} and \c{-Wno-warning} instead of \c{-w+warning} and
967 \c{-w-warning}, respectively.
970 \S{opt-v} The \i\c{-v} Option: Display \i{Version} Info
972 Typing \c{NASM -v} will display the version of NASM which you are using,
973 and the date on which it was compiled.
975 You will need the version number if you report a bug.
977 \S{opt-y} The \i\c{-y} Option: Display Available Debug Info Formats
979 Typing \c{nasm -f <option> -y} will display a list of the available
980 debug info formats for the given output format. The default format
981 is indicated by an asterisk. For example:
985 \c valid debug formats for 'elf32' output format are
986 \c ('*' denotes default):
987 \c * stabs ELF32 (i386) stabs debug format for Linux
988 \c dwarf elf32 (i386) dwarf debug format for Linux
991 \S{opt-pfix} The \i\c{--prefix} and \i\c{--postfix} Options.
993 The \c{--prefix} and \c{--postfix} options prepend or append
994 (respectively) the given argument to all \c{global} or
995 \c{extern} variables. E.g. \c{--prefix _} will prepend the
996 underscore to all global and external variables, as C sometimes
997 (but not always) likes it.
1000 \S{nasmenv} The \i\c{NASMENV} \i{Environment} Variable
1002 If you define an environment variable called \c{NASMENV}, the program
1003 will interpret it as a list of extra command-line options, which are
1004 processed before the real command line. You can use this to define
1005 standard search directories for include files, by putting \c{-i}
1006 options in the \c{NASMENV} variable.
1008 The value of the variable is split up at white space, so that the
1009 value \c{-s -ic:\\nasmlib\\} will be treated as two separate options.
1010 However, that means that the value \c{-dNAME="my name"} won't do
1011 what you might want, because it will be split at the space and the
1012 NASM command-line processing will get confused by the two
1013 nonsensical words \c{-dNAME="my} and \c{name"}.
1015 To get round this, NASM provides a feature whereby, if you begin the
1016 \c{NASMENV} environment variable with some character that isn't a minus
1017 sign, then NASM will treat this character as the \i{separator
1018 character} for options. So setting the \c{NASMENV} variable to the
1019 value \c{!-s!-ic:\\nasmlib\\} is equivalent to setting it to \c{-s
1020 -ic:\\nasmlib\\}, but \c{!-dNAME="my name"} will work.
1022 This environment variable was previously called \c{NASM}. This was
1023 changed with version 0.98.31.
1026 \H{qstart} \i{Quick Start} for \i{MASM} Users
1028 If you're used to writing programs with MASM, or with \i{TASM} in
1029 MASM-compatible (non-Ideal) mode, or with \i\c{a86}, this section
1030 attempts to outline the major differences between MASM's syntax and
1031 NASM's. If you're not already used to MASM, it's probably worth
1032 skipping this section.
1035 \S{qscs} NASM Is \I{case sensitivity}Case-Sensitive
1037 One simple difference is that NASM is case-sensitive. It makes a
1038 difference whether you call your label \c{foo}, \c{Foo} or \c{FOO}.
1039 If you're assembling to \c{DOS} or \c{OS/2} \c{.OBJ} files, you can
1040 invoke the \i\c{UPPERCASE} directive (documented in \k{objfmt}) to
1041 ensure that all symbols exported to other code modules are forced
1042 to be upper case; but even then, \e{within} a single module, NASM
1043 will distinguish between labels differing only in case.
1046 \S{qsbrackets} NASM Requires \i{Square Brackets} For \i{Memory References}
1048 NASM was designed with simplicity of syntax in mind. One of the
1049 \i{design goals} of NASM is that it should be possible, as far as is
1050 practical, for the user to look at a single line of NASM code
1051 and tell what opcode is generated by it. You can't do this in MASM:
1052 if you declare, for example,
1057 then the two lines of code
1062 generate completely different opcodes, despite having
1063 identical-looking syntaxes.
1065 NASM avoids this undesirable situation by having a much simpler
1066 syntax for memory references. The rule is simply that any access to
1067 the \e{contents} of a memory location requires square brackets
1068 around the address, and any access to the \e{address} of a variable
1069 doesn't. So an instruction of the form \c{mov ax,foo} will
1070 \e{always} refer to a compile-time constant, whether it's an \c{EQU}
1071 or the address of a variable; and to access the \e{contents} of the
1072 variable \c{bar}, you must code \c{mov ax,[bar]}.
1074 This also means that NASM has no need for MASM's \i\c{OFFSET}
1075 keyword, since the MASM code \c{mov ax,offset bar} means exactly the
1076 same thing as NASM's \c{mov ax,bar}. If you're trying to get
1077 large amounts of MASM code to assemble sensibly under NASM, you
1078 can always code \c{%idefine offset} to make the preprocessor treat
1079 the \c{OFFSET} keyword as a no-op.
1081 This issue is even more confusing in \i\c{a86}, where declaring a
1082 label with a trailing colon defines it to be a `label' as opposed to
1083 a `variable' and causes \c{a86} to adopt NASM-style semantics; so in
1084 \c{a86}, \c{mov ax,var} has different behaviour depending on whether
1085 \c{var} was declared as \c{var: dw 0} (a label) or \c{var dw 0} (a
1086 word-size variable). NASM is very simple by comparison:
1087 \e{everything} is a label.
1089 NASM, in the interests of simplicity, also does not support the
1090 \i{hybrid syntaxes} supported by MASM and its clones, such as
1091 \c{mov ax,table[bx]}, where a memory reference is denoted by one
1092 portion outside square brackets and another portion inside. The
1093 correct syntax for the above is \c{mov ax,[table+bx]}. Likewise,
1094 \c{mov ax,es:[di]} is wrong and \c{mov ax,[es:di]} is right.
1097 \S{qstypes} NASM Doesn't Store \i{Variable Types}
1099 NASM, by design, chooses not to remember the types of variables you
1100 declare. Whereas MASM will remember, on seeing \c{var dw 0}, that
1101 you declared \c{var} as a word-size variable, and will then be able
1102 to fill in the \i{ambiguity} in the size of the instruction \c{mov
1103 var,2}, NASM will deliberately remember nothing about the symbol
1104 \c{var} except where it begins, and so you must explicitly code
1105 \c{mov word [var],2}.
1107 For this reason, NASM doesn't support the \c{LODS}, \c{MOVS},
1108 \c{STOS}, \c{SCAS}, \c{CMPS}, \c{INS}, or \c{OUTS} instructions,
1109 but only supports the forms such as \c{LODSB}, \c{MOVSW}, and
1110 \c{SCASD}, which explicitly specify the size of the components of
1111 the strings being manipulated.
1114 \S{qsassume} NASM Doesn't \i\c{ASSUME}
1116 As part of NASM's drive for simplicity, it also does not support the
1117 \c{ASSUME} directive. NASM will not keep track of what values you
1118 choose to put in your segment registers, and will never
1119 \e{automatically} generate a \i{segment override} prefix.
1122 \S{qsmodel} NASM Doesn't Support \i{Memory Models}
1124 NASM also does not have any directives to support different 16-bit
1125 memory models. The programmer has to keep track of which functions
1126 are supposed to be called with a \i{far call} and which with a
1127 \i{near call}, and is responsible for putting the correct form of
1128 \c{RET} instruction (\c{RETN} or \c{RETF}; NASM accepts \c{RET}
1129 itself as an alternate form for \c{RETN}); in addition, the
1130 programmer is responsible for coding CALL FAR instructions where
1131 necessary when calling \e{external} functions, and must also keep
1132 track of which external variable definitions are far and which are
1136 \S{qsfpu} \i{Floating-Point} Differences
1138 NASM uses different names to refer to floating-point registers from
1139 MASM: where MASM would call them \c{ST(0)}, \c{ST(1)} and so on, and
1140 \i\c{a86} would call them simply \c{0}, \c{1} and so on, NASM
1141 chooses to call them \c{st0}, \c{st1} etc.
1143 As of version 0.96, NASM now treats the instructions with
1144 \i{`nowait'} forms in the same way as MASM-compatible assemblers.
1145 The idiosyncratic treatment employed by 0.95 and earlier was based
1146 on a misunderstanding by the authors.
1149 \S{qsother} Other Differences
1151 For historical reasons, NASM uses the keyword \i\c{TWORD} where MASM
1152 and compatible assemblers use \i\c{TBYTE}.
1154 NASM does not declare \i{uninitialized storage} in the same way as
1155 MASM: where a MASM programmer might use \c{stack db 64 dup (?)},
1156 NASM requires \c{stack resb 64}, intended to be read as `reserve 64
1157 bytes'. For a limited amount of compatibility, since NASM treats
1158 \c{?} as a valid character in symbol names, you can code \c{? equ 0}
1159 and then writing \c{dw ?} will at least do something vaguely useful.
1160 \I\c{RESB}\i\c{DUP} is still not a supported syntax, however.
1162 In addition to all of this, macros and directives work completely
1163 differently to MASM. See \k{preproc} and \k{directive} for further
1167 \C{lang} The NASM Language
1169 \H{syntax} Layout of a NASM Source Line
1171 Like most assemblers, each NASM source line contains (unless it
1172 is a macro, a preprocessor directive or an assembler directive: see
1173 \k{preproc} and \k{directive}) some combination of the four fields
1175 \c label: instruction operands ; comment
1177 As usual, most of these fields are optional; the presence or absence
1178 of any combination of a label, an instruction and a comment is allowed.
1179 Of course, the operand field is either required or forbidden by the
1180 presence and nature of the instruction field.
1182 NASM uses backslash (\\) as the line continuation character; if a line
1183 ends with backslash, the next line is considered to be a part of the
1184 backslash-ended line.
1186 NASM places no restrictions on white space within a line: labels may
1187 have white space before them, or instructions may have no space
1188 before them, or anything. The \i{colon} after a label is also
1189 optional. (Note that this means that if you intend to code \c{lodsb}
1190 alone on a line, and type \c{lodab} by accident, then that's still a
1191 valid source line which does nothing but define a label. Running
1192 NASM with the command-line option
1193 \I{orphan-labels}\c{-w+orphan-labels} will cause it to warn you if
1194 you define a label alone on a line without a \i{trailing colon}.)
1196 \i{Valid characters} in labels are letters, numbers, \c{_}, \c{$},
1197 \c{#}, \c{@}, \c{~}, \c{.}, and \c{?}. The only characters which may
1198 be used as the \e{first} character of an identifier are letters,
1199 \c{.} (with special meaning: see \k{locallab}), \c{_} and \c{?}.
1200 An identifier may also be prefixed with a \I{$, prefix}\c{$} to
1201 indicate that it is intended to be read as an identifier and not a
1202 reserved word; thus, if some other module you are linking with
1203 defines a symbol called \c{eax}, you can refer to \c{$eax} in NASM
1204 code to distinguish the symbol from the register. Maximum length of
1205 an identifier is 4095 characters.
1207 The instruction field may contain any machine instruction: Pentium
1208 and P6 instructions, FPU instructions, MMX instructions and even
1209 undocumented instructions are all supported. The instruction may be
1210 prefixed by \c{LOCK}, \c{REP}, \c{REPE}/\c{REPZ} or
1211 \c{REPNE}/\c{REPNZ}, in the usual way. Explicit \I{address-size
1212 prefixes}address-size and \i{operand-size prefixes} \i\c{A16},
1213 \i\c{A32}, \i\c{A64}, \i\c{O16} and \i\c{O32}, \i\c{O64} are provided - one example of their use
1214 is given in \k{mixsize}. You can also use the name of a \I{segment
1215 override}segment register as an instruction prefix: coding
1216 \c{es mov [bx],ax} is equivalent to coding \c{mov [es:bx],ax}. We
1217 recommend the latter syntax, since it is consistent with other
1218 syntactic features of the language, but for instructions such as
1219 \c{LODSB}, which has no operands and yet can require a segment
1220 override, there is no clean syntactic way to proceed apart from
1223 An instruction is not required to use a prefix: prefixes such as
1224 \c{CS}, \c{A32}, \c{LOCK} or \c{REPE} can appear on a line by
1225 themselves, and NASM will just generate the prefix bytes.
1227 In addition to actual machine instructions, NASM also supports a
1228 number of pseudo-instructions, described in \k{pseudop}.
1230 Instruction \i{operands} may take a number of forms: they can be
1231 registers, described simply by the register name (e.g. \c{ax},
1232 \c{bp}, \c{ebx}, \c{cr0}: NASM does not use the \c{gas}-style
1233 syntax in which register names must be prefixed by a \c{%} sign), or
1234 they can be \i{effective addresses} (see \k{effaddr}), constants
1235 (\k{const}) or expressions (\k{expr}).
1237 For x87 \i{floating-point} instructions, NASM accepts a wide range of
1238 syntaxes: you can use two-operand forms like MASM supports, or you
1239 can use NASM's native single-operand forms in most cases.
1241 \# all forms of each supported instruction are given in
1243 For example, you can code:
1245 \c fadd st1 ; this sets st0 := st0 + st1
1246 \c fadd st0,st1 ; so does this
1248 \c fadd st1,st0 ; this sets st1 := st1 + st0
1249 \c fadd to st1 ; so does this
1251 Almost any x87 floating-point instruction that references memory must
1252 use one of the prefixes \i\c{DWORD}, \i\c{QWORD} or \i\c{TWORD} to
1253 indicate what size of \i{memory operand} it refers to.
1256 \H{pseudop} \i{Pseudo-Instructions}
1258 Pseudo-instructions are things which, though not real x86 machine
1259 instructions, are used in the instruction field anyway because that's
1260 the most convenient place to put them. The current pseudo-instructions
1261 are \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1262 \i\c{DY}; their \i{uninitialized} counterparts \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW},
1263 \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO} and \i\c{RESY}; the
1264 \i\c{INCBIN} command, the \i\c{EQU} command, and the \i\c{TIMES}
1268 \S{db} \c{DB} and Friends: Declaring Initialized Data
1270 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1271 \i\c{DY} are used, much as in MASM, to declare initialized data in the
1272 output file. They can be invoked in a wide range of ways:
1273 \I{floating-point}\I{character constant}\I{string constant}
1275 \c db 0x55 ; just the byte 0x55
1276 \c db 0x55,0x56,0x57 ; three bytes in succession
1277 \c db 'a',0x55 ; character constants are OK
1278 \c db 'hello',13,10,'$' ; so are string constants
1279 \c dw 0x1234 ; 0x34 0x12
1280 \c dw 'a' ; 0x61 0x00 (it's just a number)
1281 \c dw 'ab' ; 0x61 0x62 (character constant)
1282 \c dw 'abc' ; 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x00 (string)
1283 \c dd 0x12345678 ; 0x78 0x56 0x34 0x12
1284 \c dd 1.234567e20 ; floating-point constant
1285 \c dq 0x123456789abcdef0 ; eight byte constant
1286 \c dq 1.234567e20 ; double-precision float
1287 \c dt 1.234567e20 ; extended-precision float
1289 \c{DT}, \c{DO} and \c{DY} do not accept \i{numeric constants} as operands.
1292 \S{resb} \c{RESB} and Friends: Declaring \i{Uninitialized} Data
1294 \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW}, \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO}
1295 and \i\c{RESY} are designed to be used in the BSS section of a module:
1296 they declare \e{uninitialized} storage space. Each takes a single
1297 operand, which is the number of bytes, words, doublewords or whatever
1298 to reserve. As stated in \k{qsother}, NASM does not support the
1299 MASM/TASM syntax of reserving uninitialized space by writing
1300 \I\c{?}\c{DW ?} or similar things: this is what it does instead. The
1301 operand to a \c{RESB}-type pseudo-instruction is a \i\e{critical
1302 expression}: see \k{crit}.
1306 \c buffer: resb 64 ; reserve 64 bytes
1307 \c wordvar: resw 1 ; reserve a word
1308 \c realarray resq 10 ; array of ten reals
1309 \c ymmval: resy 1 ; one YMM register
1311 \S{incbin} \i\c{INCBIN}: Including External \i{Binary Files}
1313 \c{INCBIN} is borrowed from the old Amiga assembler \i{DevPac}: it
1314 includes a binary file verbatim into the output file. This can be
1315 handy for (for example) including \i{graphics} and \i{sound} data
1316 directly into a game executable file. It can be called in one of
1319 \c incbin "file.dat" ; include the whole file
1320 \c incbin "file.dat",1024 ; skip the first 1024 bytes
1321 \c incbin "file.dat",1024,512 ; skip the first 1024, and
1322 \c ; actually include at most 512
1324 \c{INCBIN} is both a directive and a standard macro; the standard
1325 macro version searches for the file in the include file search path
1326 and adds the file to the dependency lists. This macro can be
1327 overridden if desired.
1330 \S{equ} \i\c{EQU}: Defining Constants
1332 \c{EQU} defines a symbol to a given constant value: when \c{EQU} is
1333 used, the source line must contain a label. The action of \c{EQU} is
1334 to define the given label name to the value of its (only) operand.
1335 This definition is absolute, and cannot change later. So, for
1338 \c message db 'hello, world'
1339 \c msglen equ $-message
1341 defines \c{msglen} to be the constant 12. \c{msglen} may not then be
1342 redefined later. This is not a \i{preprocessor} definition either:
1343 the value of \c{msglen} is evaluated \e{once}, using the value of
1344 \c{$} (see \k{expr} for an explanation of \c{$}) at the point of
1345 definition, rather than being evaluated wherever it is referenced
1346 and using the value of \c{$} at the point of reference.
1349 \S{times} \i\c{TIMES}: \i{Repeating} Instructions or Data
1351 The \c{TIMES} prefix causes the instruction to be assembled multiple
1352 times. This is partly present as NASM's equivalent of the \i\c{DUP}
1353 syntax supported by \i{MASM}-compatible assemblers, in that you can
1356 \c zerobuf: times 64 db 0
1358 or similar things; but \c{TIMES} is more versatile than that. The
1359 argument to \c{TIMES} is not just a numeric constant, but a numeric
1360 \e{expression}, so you can do things like
1362 \c buffer: db 'hello, world'
1363 \c times 64-$+buffer db ' '
1365 which will store exactly enough spaces to make the total length of
1366 \c{buffer} up to 64. Finally, \c{TIMES} can be applied to ordinary
1367 instructions, so you can code trivial \i{unrolled loops} in it:
1371 Note that there is no effective difference between \c{times 100 resb
1372 1} and \c{resb 100}, except that the latter will be assembled about
1373 100 times faster due to the internal structure of the assembler.
1375 The operand to \c{TIMES} is a critical expression (\k{crit}).
1377 Note also that \c{TIMES} can't be applied to \i{macros}: the reason
1378 for this is that \c{TIMES} is processed after the macro phase, which
1379 allows the argument to \c{TIMES} to contain expressions such as
1380 \c{64-$+buffer} as above. To repeat more than one line of code, or a
1381 complex macro, use the preprocessor \i\c{%rep} directive.
1384 \H{effaddr} Effective Addresses
1386 An \i{effective address} is any operand to an instruction which
1387 \I{memory reference}references memory. Effective addresses, in NASM,
1388 have a very simple syntax: they consist of an expression evaluating
1389 to the desired address, enclosed in \i{square brackets}. For
1394 \c mov ax,[wordvar+1]
1395 \c mov ax,[es:wordvar+bx]
1397 Anything not conforming to this simple system is not a valid memory
1398 reference in NASM, for example \c{es:wordvar[bx]}.
1400 More complicated effective addresses, such as those involving more
1401 than one register, work in exactly the same way:
1403 \c mov eax,[ebx*2+ecx+offset]
1406 NASM is capable of doing \i{algebra} on these effective addresses,
1407 so that things which don't necessarily \e{look} legal are perfectly
1410 \c mov eax,[ebx*5] ; assembles as [ebx*4+ebx]
1411 \c mov eax,[label1*2-label2] ; ie [label1+(label1-label2)]
1413 Some forms of effective address have more than one assembled form;
1414 in most such cases NASM will generate the smallest form it can. For
1415 example, there are distinct assembled forms for the 32-bit effective
1416 addresses \c{[eax*2+0]} and \c{[eax+eax]}, and NASM will generally
1417 generate the latter on the grounds that the former requires four
1418 bytes to store a zero offset.
1420 NASM has a hinting mechanism which will cause \c{[eax+ebx]} and
1421 \c{[ebx+eax]} to generate different opcodes; this is occasionally
1422 useful because \c{[esi+ebp]} and \c{[ebp+esi]} have different
1423 default segment registers.
1425 However, you can force NASM to generate an effective address in a
1426 particular form by the use of the keywords \c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1427 \c{DWORD} and \c{NOSPLIT}. If you need \c{[eax+3]} to be assembled
1428 using a double-word offset field instead of the one byte NASM will
1429 normally generate, you can code \c{[dword eax+3]}. Similarly, you
1430 can force NASM to use a byte offset for a small value which it
1431 hasn't seen on the first pass (see \k{crit} for an example of such a
1432 code fragment) by using \c{[byte eax+offset]}. As special cases,
1433 \c{[byte eax]} will code \c{[eax+0]} with a byte offset of zero, and
1434 \c{[dword eax]} will code it with a double-word offset of zero. The
1435 normal form, \c{[eax]}, will be coded with no offset field.
1437 The form described in the previous paragraph is also useful if you
1438 are trying to access data in a 32-bit segment from within 16 bit code.
1439 For more information on this see the section on mixed-size addressing
1440 (\k{mixaddr}). In particular, if you need to access data with a known
1441 offset that is larger than will fit in a 16-bit value, if you don't
1442 specify that it is a dword offset, nasm will cause the high word of
1443 the offset to be lost.
1445 Similarly, NASM will split \c{[eax*2]} into \c{[eax+eax]} because
1446 that allows the offset field to be absent and space to be saved; in
1447 fact, it will also split \c{[eax*2+offset]} into
1448 \c{[eax+eax+offset]}. You can combat this behaviour by the use of
1449 the \c{NOSPLIT} keyword: \c{[nosplit eax*2]} will force
1450 \c{[eax*2+0]} to be generated literally.
1452 In 64-bit mode, NASM will by default generate absolute addresses. The
1453 \i\c{REL} keyword makes it produce \c{RIP}-relative addresses. Since
1454 this is frequently the normally desired behaviour, see the \c{DEFAULT}
1455 directive (\k{default}). The keyword \i\c{ABS} overrides \i\c{REL}.
1458 \H{const} \i{Constants}
1460 NASM understands four different types of constant: numeric,
1461 character, string and floating-point.
1464 \S{numconst} \i{Numeric Constants}
1466 A numeric constant is simply a number. NASM allows you to specify
1467 numbers in a variety of number bases, in a variety of ways: you can
1468 suffix \c{H} or \c{X}, \c{D} or \c{T}, \c{Q} or \c{O}, and \c{B} or
1469 \c{Y} for \i{hexadecimal}, \i{decimal}, \i{octal} and \i{binary}
1470 respectively, or you can prefix \c{0x}, for hexadecimal in the style
1471 of C, or you can prefix \c{$} for hexadecimal in the style of Borland
1472 Pascal or Motorola Assemblers. Note, though, that the \I{$,
1473 prefix}\c{$} prefix does double duty as a prefix on identifiers (see
1474 \k{syntax}), so a hex number prefixed with a \c{$} sign must have a
1475 digit after the \c{$} rather than a letter. In addition, current
1476 versions of NASM accept the prefix \c{0h} for hexadecimal, \c{0d} or
1477 \c{0t} for decimal, \c{0o} or \c{0q} for octal, and \c{0b} or \c{0y}
1478 for binary. Please note that unlike C, a \c{0} prefix by itself does
1479 \e{not} imply an octal constant!
1481 Numeric constants can have underscores (\c{_}) interspersed to break
1484 Some examples (all producing exactly the same code):
1486 \c mov ax,200 ; decimal
1487 \c mov ax,0200 ; still decimal
1488 \c mov ax,0200d ; explicitly decimal
1489 \c mov ax,0d200 ; also decimal
1490 \c mov ax,0c8h ; hex
1491 \c mov ax,$0c8 ; hex again: the 0 is required
1492 \c mov ax,0xc8 ; hex yet again
1493 \c mov ax,0hc8 ; still hex
1494 \c mov ax,310q ; octal
1495 \c mov ax,310o ; octal again
1496 \c mov ax,0o310 ; octal yet again
1497 \c mov ax,0q310 ; hex yet again
1498 \c mov ax,11001000b ; binary
1499 \c mov ax,1100_1000b ; same binary constant
1500 \c mov ax,1100_1000y ; same binary constant once more
1501 \c mov ax,0b1100_1000 ; same binary constant yet again
1502 \c mov ax,0y1100_1000 ; same binary constant yet again
1504 \S{strings} \I{Strings}\i{Character Strings}
1506 A character string consists of up to eight characters enclosed in
1507 either single quotes (\c{'...'}), double quotes (\c{"..."}) or
1508 backquotes (\c{`...`}). Single or double quotes are equivalent to
1509 NASM (except of course that surrounding the constant with single
1510 quotes allows double quotes to appear within it and vice versa); the
1511 contents of those are represented verbatim. Strings enclosed in
1512 backquotes support C-style \c{\\}-escapes for special characters.
1515 The following \i{escape sequences} are recognized by backquoted strings:
1517 \c \' single quote (')
1518 \c \" double quote (")
1520 \c \\\ backslash (\)
1521 \c \? question mark (?)
1529 \c \e ESC (ASCII 27)
1530 \c \377 Up to 3 octal digits - literal byte
1531 \c \xFF Up to 2 hexadecimal digits - literal byte
1532 \c \u1234 4 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1533 \c \U12345678 8 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1535 All other escape sequences are reserved. Note that \c{\\0}, meaning a
1536 \c{NUL} character (ASCII 0), is a special case of the octal escape
1539 \i{Unicode} characters specified with \c{\\u} or \c{\\U} are converted to
1540 \i{UTF-8}. For example, the following lines are all equivalent:
1542 \c db `\u263a` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1543 \c db `\xe2\x98\xba` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1544 \c db 0E2h, 098h, 0BAh ; UTF-8 smiley face
1547 \S{chrconst} \i{Character Constants}
1549 A character constant consists of a string up to eight bytes long, used
1550 in an expression context. It is treated as if it was an integer.
1552 A character constant with more than one byte will be arranged
1553 with \i{little-endian} order in mind: if you code
1557 then the constant generated is not \c{0x61626364}, but
1558 \c{0x64636261}, so that if you were then to store the value into
1559 memory, it would read \c{abcd} rather than \c{dcba}. This is also
1560 the sense of character constants understood by the Pentium's
1561 \i\c{CPUID} instruction.
1564 \S{strconst} \i{String Constants}
1566 String constants are character strings used in the context of some
1567 pseudo-instructions, namely the
1568 \I\c{DW}\I\c{DD}\I\c{DQ}\I\c{DT}\I\c{DO}\I\c{DY}\i\c{DB} family and
1569 \i\c{INCBIN} (where it represents a filename.) They are also used in
1570 certain preprocessor directives.
1572 A string constant looks like a character constant, only longer. It
1573 is treated as a concatenation of maximum-size character constants
1574 for the conditions. So the following are equivalent:
1576 \c db 'hello' ; string constant
1577 \c db 'h','e','l','l','o' ; equivalent character constants
1579 And the following are also equivalent:
1581 \c dd 'ninechars' ; doubleword string constant
1582 \c dd 'nine','char','s' ; becomes three doublewords
1583 \c db 'ninechars',0,0,0 ; and really looks like this
1585 Note that when used in a string-supporting context, quoted strings are
1586 treated as a string constants even if they are short enough to be a
1587 character constant, because otherwise \c{db 'ab'} would have the same
1588 effect as \c{db 'a'}, which would be silly. Similarly, three-character
1589 or four-character constants are treated as strings when they are
1590 operands to \c{DW}, and so forth.
1592 \S{unicode} \I{UTF-16}\I{UTF-32}\i{Unicode} Strings
1594 The special operators \i\c{__utf16__} and \i\c{__utf32__} allows
1595 definition of Unicode strings. They take a string in UTF-8 format and
1596 converts it to (littleendian) UTF-16 or UTF-32, respectively.
1600 \c %define u(x) __utf16__(x)
1601 \c %define w(x) __utf32__(x)
1603 \c dw u('C:\WINDOWS'), 0 ; Pathname in UTF-16
1604 \c dd w(`A + B = \u206a`), 0 ; String in UTF-32
1606 \c{__utf16__} and \c{__utf32__} can be applied either to strings
1607 passed to the \c{DB} family instructions, or to character constants in
1608 an expression context.
1610 \S{fltconst} \I{floating-point, constants}Floating-Point Constants
1612 \i{Floating-point} constants are acceptable only as arguments to
1613 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, and \i\c{DO}, or as
1614 arguments to the special operators \i\c{__float8__},
1615 \i\c{__float16__}, \i\c{__float32__}, \i\c{__float64__},
1616 \i\c{__float80m__}, \i\c{__float80e__}, \i\c{__float128l__}, and
1617 \i\c{__float128h__}.
1619 Floating-point constants are expressed in the traditional form:
1620 digits, then a period, then optionally more digits, then optionally an
1621 \c{E} followed by an exponent. The period is mandatory, so that NASM
1622 can distinguish between \c{dd 1}, which declares an integer constant,
1623 and \c{dd 1.0} which declares a floating-point constant.
1625 NASM also support C99-style hexadecimal floating-point: \c{0x},
1626 hexadecimal digits, period, optionally more hexadeximal digits, then
1627 optionally a \c{P} followed by a \e{binary} (not hexadecimal) exponent
1628 in decimal notation. As an extension, NASM additionally supports the
1629 \c{0h} and \c{$} prefixes for hexadecimal, as well binary and octal
1630 floating-point, using the \c{0b} or \c{0y} and \c{0o} or \c{0q}
1631 prefixes, respectively.
1633 Underscores to break up groups of digits are permitted in
1634 floating-point constants as well.
1638 \c db -0.2 ; "Quarter precision"
1639 \c dw -0.5 ; IEEE 754r/SSE5 half precision
1640 \c dd 1.2 ; an easy one
1641 \c dd 1.222_222_222 ; underscores are permitted
1642 \c dd 0x1p+2 ; 1.0x2^2 = 4.0
1643 \c dq 0x1p+32 ; 1.0x2^32 = 4 294 967 296.0
1644 \c dq 1.e10 ; 10 000 000 000.0
1645 \c dq 1.e+10 ; synonymous with 1.e10
1646 \c dq 1.e-10 ; 0.000 000 000 1
1647 \c dt 3.141592653589793238462 ; pi
1648 \c do 1.e+4000 ; IEEE 754r quad precision
1650 The 8-bit "quarter-precision" floating-point format is
1651 sign:exponent:mantissa = 1:4:3 with an exponent bias of 7. This
1652 appears to be the most frequently used 8-bit floating-point format,
1653 although it is not covered by any formal standard. This is sometimes
1654 called a "\i{minifloat}."
1656 The special operators are used to produce floating-point numbers in
1657 other contexts. They produce the binary representation of a specific
1658 floating-point number as an integer, and can use anywhere integer
1659 constants are used in an expression. \c{__float80m__} and
1660 \c{__float80e__} produce the 64-bit mantissa and 16-bit exponent of an
1661 80-bit floating-point number, and \c{__float128l__} and
1662 \c{__float128h__} produce the lower and upper 64-bit halves of a 128-bit
1663 floating-point number, respectively.
1667 \c mov rax,__float64__(3.141592653589793238462)
1669 ... would assign the binary representation of pi as a 64-bit floating
1670 point number into \c{RAX}. This is exactly equivalent to:
1672 \c mov rax,0x400921fb54442d18
1674 NASM cannot do compile-time arithmetic on floating-point constants.
1675 This is because NASM is designed to be portable - although it always
1676 generates code to run on x86 processors, the assembler itself can
1677 run on any system with an ANSI C compiler. Therefore, the assembler
1678 cannot guarantee the presence of a floating-point unit capable of
1679 handling the \i{Intel number formats}, and so for NASM to be able to
1680 do floating arithmetic it would have to include its own complete set
1681 of floating-point routines, which would significantly increase the
1682 size of the assembler for very little benefit.
1684 The special tokens \i\c{__Infinity__}, \i\c{__QNaN__} (or
1685 \i\c{__NaN__}) and \i\c{__SNaN__} can be used to generate
1686 \I{infinity}infinities, quiet \i{NaN}s, and signalling NaNs,
1687 respectively. These are normally used as macros:
1689 \c %define Inf __Infinity__
1690 \c %define NaN __QNaN__
1692 \c dq +1.5, -Inf, NaN ; Double-precision constants
1694 \S{bcdconst} \I{floating-point, packed BCD constants}Packed BCD Constants
1696 x87-style packed BCD constants can be used in the same contexts as
1697 80-bit floating-point numbers. They are suffixed with \c{p} or
1698 prefixed with \c{0p}, and can include up to 18 decimal digits.
1700 As with other numeric constants, underscores can be used to separate
1705 \c dt 12_345_678_901_245_678p
1706 \c dt -12_345_678_901_245_678p
1711 \H{expr} \i{Expressions}
1713 Expressions in NASM are similar in syntax to those in C. Expressions
1714 are evaluated as 64-bit integers which are then adjusted to the
1717 NASM supports two special tokens in expressions, allowing
1718 calculations to involve the current assembly position: the
1719 \I{$, here}\c{$} and \i\c{$$} tokens. \c{$} evaluates to the assembly
1720 position at the beginning of the line containing the expression; so
1721 you can code an \i{infinite loop} using \c{JMP $}. \c{$$} evaluates
1722 to the beginning of the current section; so you can tell how far
1723 into the section you are by using \c{($-$$)}.
1725 The arithmetic \i{operators} provided by NASM are listed here, in
1726 increasing order of \i{precedence}.
1729 \S{expor} \i\c{|}: \i{Bitwise OR} Operator
1731 The \c{|} operator gives a bitwise OR, exactly as performed by the
1732 \c{OR} machine instruction. Bitwise OR is the lowest-priority
1733 arithmetic operator supported by NASM.
1736 \S{expxor} \i\c{^}: \i{Bitwise XOR} Operator
1738 \c{^} provides the bitwise XOR operation.
1741 \S{expand} \i\c{&}: \i{Bitwise AND} Operator
1743 \c{&} provides the bitwise AND operation.
1746 \S{expshift} \i\c{<<} and \i\c{>>}: \i{Bit Shift} Operators
1748 \c{<<} gives a bit-shift to the left, just as it does in C. So \c{5<<3}
1749 evaluates to 5 times 8, or 40. \c{>>} gives a bit-shift to the
1750 right; in NASM, such a shift is \e{always} unsigned, so that
1751 the bits shifted in from the left-hand end are filled with zero
1752 rather than a sign-extension of the previous highest bit.
1755 \S{expplmi} \I{+ opaddition}\c{+} and \I{- opsubtraction}\c{-}:
1756 \i{Addition} and \i{Subtraction} Operators
1758 The \c{+} and \c{-} operators do perfectly ordinary addition and
1762 \S{expmul} \i\c{*}, \i\c{/}, \i\c{//}, \i\c{%} and \i\c{%%}:
1763 \i{Multiplication} and \i{Division}
1765 \c{*} is the multiplication operator. \c{/} and \c{//} are both
1766 division operators: \c{/} is \i{unsigned division} and \c{//} is
1767 \i{signed division}. Similarly, \c{%} and \c{%%} provide \I{unsigned
1768 modulo}\I{modulo operators}unsigned and
1769 \i{signed modulo} operators respectively.
1771 NASM, like ANSI C, provides no guarantees about the sensible
1772 operation of the signed modulo operator.
1774 Since the \c{%} character is used extensively by the macro
1775 \i{preprocessor}, you should ensure that both the signed and unsigned
1776 modulo operators are followed by white space wherever they appear.
1779 \S{expmul} \i{Unary Operators}: \I{+ opunary}\c{+}, \I{- opunary}\c{-},
1780 \i\c{~}, \I{! opunary}\c{!} and \i\c{SEG}
1782 The highest-priority operators in NASM's expression grammar are
1783 those which only apply to one argument. \c{-} negates its operand,
1784 \c{+} does nothing (it's provided for symmetry with \c{-}), \c{~}
1785 computes the \i{one's complement} of its operand, \c{!} is the
1786 \i{logical negation} operator, and \c{SEG} provides the \i{segment address}
1787 of its operand (explained in more detail in \k{segwrt}).
1790 \H{segwrt} \i\c{SEG} and \i\c{WRT}
1792 When writing large 16-bit programs, which must be split into
1793 multiple \i{segments}, it is often necessary to be able to refer to
1794 the \I{segment address}segment part of the address of a symbol. NASM
1795 supports the \c{SEG} operator to perform this function.
1797 The \c{SEG} operator returns the \i\e{preferred} segment base of a
1798 symbol, defined as the segment base relative to which the offset of
1799 the symbol makes sense. So the code
1801 \c mov ax,seg symbol
1805 will load \c{ES:BX} with a valid pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1807 Things can be more complex than this: since 16-bit segments and
1808 \i{groups} may \I{overlapping segments}overlap, you might occasionally
1809 want to refer to some symbol using a different segment base from the
1810 preferred one. NASM lets you do this, by the use of the \c{WRT}
1811 (With Reference To) keyword. So you can do things like
1813 \c mov ax,weird_seg ; weird_seg is a segment base
1815 \c mov bx,symbol wrt weird_seg
1817 to load \c{ES:BX} with a different, but functionally equivalent,
1818 pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1820 NASM supports far (inter-segment) calls and jumps by means of the
1821 syntax \c{call segment:offset}, where \c{segment} and \c{offset}
1822 both represent immediate values. So to call a far procedure, you
1823 could code either of
1825 \c call (seg procedure):procedure
1826 \c call weird_seg:(procedure wrt weird_seg)
1828 (The parentheses are included for clarity, to show the intended
1829 parsing of the above instructions. They are not necessary in
1832 NASM supports the syntax \I\c{CALL FAR}\c{call far procedure} as a
1833 synonym for the first of the above usages. \c{JMP} works identically
1834 to \c{CALL} in these examples.
1836 To declare a \i{far pointer} to a data item in a data segment, you
1839 \c dw symbol, seg symbol
1841 NASM supports no convenient synonym for this, though you can always
1842 invent one using the macro processor.
1845 \H{strict} \i\c{STRICT}: Inhibiting Optimization
1847 When assembling with the optimizer set to level 2 or higher (see
1848 \k{opt-O}), NASM will use size specifiers (\c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1849 \c{DWORD}, \c{QWORD}, \c{TWORD}, \c{OWORD} or \c{YWORD}), but will
1850 give them the smallest possible size. The keyword \c{STRICT} can be
1851 used to inhibit optimization and force a particular operand to be
1852 emitted in the specified size. For example, with the optimizer on, and
1853 in \c{BITS 16} mode,
1857 is encoded in three bytes \c{66 6A 21}, whereas
1859 \c push strict dword 33
1861 is encoded in six bytes, with a full dword immediate operand \c{66 68
1864 With the optimizer off, the same code (six bytes) is generated whether
1865 the \c{STRICT} keyword was used or not.
1868 \H{crit} \i{Critical Expressions}
1870 Although NASM has an optional multi-pass optimizer, there are some
1871 expressions which must be resolvable on the first pass. These are
1872 called \e{Critical Expressions}.
1874 The first pass is used to determine the size of all the assembled
1875 code and data, so that the second pass, when generating all the
1876 code, knows all the symbol addresses the code refers to. So one
1877 thing NASM can't handle is code whose size depends on the value of a
1878 symbol declared after the code in question. For example,
1880 \c times (label-$) db 0
1881 \c label: db 'Where am I?'
1883 The argument to \i\c{TIMES} in this case could equally legally
1884 evaluate to anything at all; NASM will reject this example because
1885 it cannot tell the size of the \c{TIMES} line when it first sees it.
1886 It will just as firmly reject the slightly \I{paradox}paradoxical
1889 \c times (label-$+1) db 0
1890 \c label: db 'NOW where am I?'
1892 in which \e{any} value for the \c{TIMES} argument is by definition
1895 NASM rejects these examples by means of a concept called a
1896 \e{critical expression}, which is defined to be an expression whose
1897 value is required to be computable in the first pass, and which must
1898 therefore depend only on symbols defined before it. The argument to
1899 the \c{TIMES} prefix is a critical expression.
1901 \H{locallab} \i{Local Labels}
1903 NASM gives special treatment to symbols beginning with a \i{period}.
1904 A label beginning with a single period is treated as a \e{local}
1905 label, which means that it is associated with the previous non-local
1906 label. So, for example:
1908 \c label1 ; some code
1916 \c label2 ; some code
1924 In the above code fragment, each \c{JNE} instruction jumps to the
1925 line immediately before it, because the two definitions of \c{.loop}
1926 are kept separate by virtue of each being associated with the
1927 previous non-local label.
1929 This form of local label handling is borrowed from the old Amiga
1930 assembler \i{DevPac}; however, NASM goes one step further, in
1931 allowing access to local labels from other parts of the code. This
1932 is achieved by means of \e{defining} a local label in terms of the
1933 previous non-local label: the first definition of \c{.loop} above is
1934 really defining a symbol called \c{label1.loop}, and the second
1935 defines a symbol called \c{label2.loop}. So, if you really needed
1938 \c label3 ; some more code
1943 Sometimes it is useful - in a macro, for instance - to be able to
1944 define a label which can be referenced from anywhere but which
1945 doesn't interfere with the normal local-label mechanism. Such a
1946 label can't be non-local because it would interfere with subsequent
1947 definitions of, and references to, local labels; and it can't be
1948 local because the macro that defined it wouldn't know the label's
1949 full name. NASM therefore introduces a third type of label, which is
1950 probably only useful in macro definitions: if a label begins with
1951 the \I{label prefix}special prefix \i\c{..@}, then it does nothing
1952 to the local label mechanism. So you could code
1954 \c label1: ; a non-local label
1955 \c .local: ; this is really label1.local
1956 \c ..@foo: ; this is a special symbol
1957 \c label2: ; another non-local label
1958 \c .local: ; this is really label2.local
1960 \c jmp ..@foo ; this will jump three lines up
1962 NASM has the capacity to define other special symbols beginning with
1963 a double period: for example, \c{..start} is used to specify the
1964 entry point in the \c{obj} output format (see \k{dotdotstart}),
1965 \c{..imagebase} is used to find out the offset from a base address
1966 of the current image in the \c{win64} output format (see \k{win64pic}).
1967 So just keep in mind that symbols beginning with a double period are
1971 \C{preproc} The NASM \i{Preprocessor}
1973 NASM contains a powerful \i{macro processor}, which supports
1974 conditional assembly, multi-level file inclusion, two forms of macro
1975 (single-line and multi-line), and a `context stack' mechanism for
1976 extra macro power. Preprocessor directives all begin with a \c{%}
1979 The preprocessor collapses all lines which end with a backslash (\\)
1980 character into a single line. Thus:
1982 \c %define THIS_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME_IS_DEFINED_TO \\
1985 will work like a single-line macro without the backslash-newline
1988 \H{slmacro} \i{Single-Line Macros}
1990 \S{define} The Normal Way: \I\c{%idefine}\i\c{%define}
1992 Single-line macros are defined using the \c{%define} preprocessor
1993 directive. The definitions work in a similar way to C; so you can do
1996 \c %define ctrl 0x1F &
1997 \c %define param(a,b) ((a)+(a)*(b))
1999 \c mov byte [param(2,ebx)], ctrl 'D'
2001 which will expand to
2003 \c mov byte [(2)+(2)*(ebx)], 0x1F & 'D'
2005 When the expansion of a single-line macro contains tokens which
2006 invoke another macro, the expansion is performed at invocation time,
2007 not at definition time. Thus the code
2009 \c %define a(x) 1+b(x)
2014 will evaluate in the expected way to \c{mov ax,1+2*8}, even though
2015 the macro \c{b} wasn't defined at the time of definition of \c{a}.
2017 Macros defined with \c{%define} are \i{case sensitive}: after
2018 \c{%define foo bar}, only \c{foo} will expand to \c{bar}: \c{Foo} or
2019 \c{FOO} will not. By using \c{%idefine} instead of \c{%define} (the
2020 `i' stands for `insensitive') you can define all the case variants
2021 of a macro at once, so that \c{%idefine foo bar} would cause
2022 \c{foo}, \c{Foo}, \c{FOO}, \c{fOO} and so on all to expand to
2025 There is a mechanism which detects when a macro call has occurred as
2026 a result of a previous expansion of the same macro, to guard against
2027 \i{circular references} and infinite loops. If this happens, the
2028 preprocessor will only expand the first occurrence of the macro.
2031 \c %define a(x) 1+a(x)
2035 the macro \c{a(3)} will expand once, becoming \c{1+a(3)}, and will
2036 then expand no further. This behaviour can be useful: see \k{32c}
2037 for an example of its use.
2039 You can \I{overloading, single-line macros}overload single-line
2040 macros: if you write
2042 \c %define foo(x) 1+x
2043 \c %define foo(x,y) 1+x*y
2045 the preprocessor will be able to handle both types of macro call,
2046 by counting the parameters you pass; so \c{foo(3)} will become
2047 \c{1+3} whereas \c{foo(ebx,2)} will become \c{1+ebx*2}. However, if
2052 then no other definition of \c{foo} will be accepted: a macro with
2053 no parameters prohibits the definition of the same name as a macro
2054 \e{with} parameters, and vice versa.
2056 This doesn't prevent single-line macros being \e{redefined}: you can
2057 perfectly well define a macro with
2061 and then re-define it later in the same source file with
2065 Then everywhere the macro \c{foo} is invoked, it will be expanded
2066 according to the most recent definition. This is particularly useful
2067 when defining single-line macros with \c{%assign} (see \k{assign}).
2069 You can \i{pre-define} single-line macros using the `-d' option on
2070 the NASM command line: see \k{opt-d}.
2073 \S{xdefine} Resolving \c{%define}: \I\c{%ixdefine}\i\c{%xdefine}
2075 To have a reference to an embedded single-line macro resolved at the
2076 time that the embedding macro is \e{defined}, as opposed to when the
2077 embedding macro is \e{expanded}, you need a different mechanism to the
2078 one offered by \c{%define}. The solution is to use \c{%xdefine}, or
2079 it's \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive counterpart \c{%ixdefine}.
2081 Suppose you have the following code:
2084 \c %define isFalse isTrue
2093 In this case, \c{val1} is equal to 0, and \c{val2} is equal to 1.
2094 This is because, when a single-line macro is defined using
2095 \c{%define}, it is expanded only when it is called. As \c{isFalse}
2096 expands to \c{isTrue}, the expansion will be the current value of
2097 \c{isTrue}. The first time it is called that is 0, and the second
2100 If you wanted \c{isFalse} to expand to the value assigned to the
2101 embedded macro \c{isTrue} at the time that \c{isFalse} was defined,
2102 you need to change the above code to use \c{%xdefine}.
2104 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2105 \c %xdefine isFalse isTrue
2106 \c %xdefine isTrue 0
2110 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2114 Now, each time that \c{isFalse} is called, it expands to 1,
2115 as that is what the embedded macro \c{isTrue} expanded to at
2116 the time that \c{isFalse} was defined.
2119 \S{indmacro} \i{Macro Indirection}: \I\c{%[}\c{%[...]}
2121 The \c{%[...]} construct can be used to expand macros in contexts
2122 where macro expansion would otherwise not occur, including in the
2123 names other macros. For example, if you have a set of macros named
2124 \c{Foo16}, \c{Foo32} and \c{Foo64}, you could write:
2126 \c mov ax,Foo%[__BITS__] ; The Foo value
2128 to use the builtin macro \c{__BITS__} (see \k{bitsm}) to automatically
2129 select between them. Similarly, the two statements:
2131 \c %xdefine Bar Quux ; Expands due to %xdefine
2132 \c %define Bar %[Quux] ; Expands due to %[...]
2134 have, in fact, exactly the same effect.
2136 \c{%[...]} concatenates to adjacent tokens in the same way that
2137 multi-line macro parameters do, see \k{concat} for details.
2140 \S{concat%+} Concatenating Single Line Macro Tokens: \i\c{%+}
2142 Individual tokens in single line macros can be concatenated, to produce
2143 longer tokens for later processing. This can be useful if there are
2144 several similar macros that perform similar functions.
2146 Please note that a space is required after \c{%+}, in order to
2147 disambiguate it from the syntax \c{%+1} used in multiline macros.
2149 As an example, consider the following:
2151 \c %define BDASTART 400h ; Start of BIOS data area
2153 \c struc tBIOSDA ; its structure
2159 Now, if we need to access the elements of tBIOSDA in different places,
2162 \c mov ax,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM1addr
2163 \c mov bx,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM2addr
2165 This will become pretty ugly (and tedious) if used in many places, and
2166 can be reduced in size significantly by using the following macro:
2168 \c ; Macro to access BIOS variables by their names (from tBDA):
2170 \c %define BDA(x) BDASTART + tBIOSDA. %+ x
2172 Now the above code can be written as:
2174 \c mov ax,BDA(COM1addr)
2175 \c mov bx,BDA(COM2addr)
2177 Using this feature, we can simplify references to a lot of macros (and,
2178 in turn, reduce typing errors).
2181 \S{selfref%?} The Macro Name Itself: \i\c{%?} and \i\c{%??}
2183 The special symbols \c{%?} and \c{%??} can be used to reference the
2184 macro name itself inside a macro expansion, this is supported for both
2185 single-and multi-line macros. \c{%?} refers to the macro name as
2186 \e{invoked}, whereas \c{%??} refers to the macro name as
2187 \e{declared}. The two are always the same for case-sensitive
2188 macros, but for case-insensitive macros, they can differ.
2192 \c %idefine Foo mov %?,%??
2204 \c %idefine keyword $%?
2206 can be used to make a keyword "disappear", for example in case a new
2207 instruction has been used as a label in older code. For example:
2209 \c %idefine pause $%? ; Hide the PAUSE instruction
2212 \S{undef} Undefining Single-Line Macros: \i\c{%undef}
2214 Single-line macros can be removed with the \c{%undef} directive. For
2215 example, the following sequence:
2222 will expand to the instruction \c{mov eax, foo}, since after
2223 \c{%undef} the macro \c{foo} is no longer defined.
2225 Macros that would otherwise be pre-defined can be undefined on the
2226 command-line using the `-u' option on the NASM command line: see
2230 \S{assign} \i{Preprocessor Variables}: \i\c{%assign}
2232 An alternative way to define single-line macros is by means of the
2233 \c{%assign} command (and its \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive
2234 counterpart \i\c{%iassign}, which differs from \c{%assign} in
2235 exactly the same way that \c{%idefine} differs from \c{%define}).
2237 \c{%assign} is used to define single-line macros which take no
2238 parameters and have a numeric value. This value can be specified in
2239 the form of an expression, and it will be evaluated once, when the
2240 \c{%assign} directive is processed.
2242 Like \c{%define}, macros defined using \c{%assign} can be re-defined
2243 later, so you can do things like
2247 to increment the numeric value of a macro.
2249 \c{%assign} is useful for controlling the termination of \c{%rep}
2250 preprocessor loops: see \k{rep} for an example of this. Another
2251 use for \c{%assign} is given in \k{16c} and \k{32c}.
2253 The expression passed to \c{%assign} is a \i{critical expression}
2254 (see \k{crit}), and must also evaluate to a pure number (rather than
2255 a relocatable reference such as a code or data address, or anything
2256 involving a register).
2259 \S{defstr} Defining Strings: \I\c{%idefstr}\i\c{%defstr}
2261 \c{%defstr}, and its case-insensitive counterpart \c{%idefstr}, define
2262 or redefine a single-line macro without parameters but converts the
2263 entire right-hand side, after macro expansion, to a quoted string
2268 \c %defstr test TEST
2272 \c %define test 'TEST'
2274 This can be used, for example, with the \c{%!} construct (see
2277 \c %defstr PATH %!PATH ; The operating system PATH variable
2280 \S{deftok} Defining Tokens: \I\c{%ideftok}\i\c{%deftok}
2282 \c{%deftok}, and its case-insensitive counterpart \c{%ideftok}, define
2283 or redefine a single-line macro without parameters but converts the
2284 second parameter, after string conversion, to a sequence of tokens.
2288 \c %deftok test 'TEST'
2292 \c %define test TEST
2295 \H{strlen} \i{String Manipulation in Macros}
2297 It's often useful to be able to handle strings in macros. NASM
2298 supports a few simple string handling macro operators from which
2299 more complex operations can be constructed.
2301 All the string operators define or redefine a value (either a string
2302 or a numeric value) to a single-line macro. When producing a string
2303 value, it may change the style of quoting of the input string or
2304 strings, and possibly use \c{\\}-escapes inside \c{`}-quoted strings.
2306 \S{strcat} \i{Concatenating Strings}: \i\c{%strcat}
2308 The \c{%strcat} operator concatenates quoted strings and assign them to
2309 a single-line macro.
2313 \c %strcat alpha "Alpha: ", '12" screen'
2315 ... would assign the value \c{'Alpha: 12" screen'} to \c{alpha}.
2318 \c %strcat beta '"foo"\', "'bar'"
2320 ... would assign the value \c{`"foo"\\\\'bar'`} to \c{beta}.
2322 The use of commas to separate strings is permitted but optional.
2325 \S{strlen} \i{String Length}: \i\c{%strlen}
2327 The \c{%strlen} operator assigns the length of a string to a macro.
2330 \c %strlen charcnt 'my string'
2332 In this example, \c{charcnt} would receive the value 9, just as
2333 if an \c{%assign} had been used. In this example, \c{'my string'}
2334 was a literal string but it could also have been a single-line
2335 macro that expands to a string, as in the following example:
2337 \c %define sometext 'my string'
2338 \c %strlen charcnt sometext
2340 As in the first case, this would result in \c{charcnt} being
2341 assigned the value of 9.
2344 \S{substr} \i{Extracting Substrings}: \i\c{%substr}
2346 Individual letters or substrings in strings can be extracted using the
2347 \c{%substr} operator. An example of its use is probably more useful
2348 than the description:
2350 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'x'
2351 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'y'
2352 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 3 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'z'
2353 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2354 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yzw'
2355 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2357 As with \c{%strlen} (see \k{strlen}), the first parameter is the
2358 single-line macro to be created and the second is the string. The
2359 third parameter specifies the first character to be selected, and the
2360 optional fourth parameter preceeded by comma) is the length. Note
2361 that the first index is 1, not 0 and the last index is equal to the
2362 value that \c{%strlen} would assign given the same string. Index
2363 values out of range result in an empty string. A negative length
2364 means "until N-1 characters before the end of string", i.e. \c{-1}
2365 means until end of string, \c{-2} until one character before, etc.
2368 \H{mlmacro} \i{Multi-Line Macros}: \I\c{%imacro}\i\c{%macro}
2370 Multi-line macros are much more like the type of macro seen in MASM
2371 and TASM: a multi-line macro definition in NASM looks something like
2374 \c %macro prologue 1
2382 This defines a C-like function prologue as a macro: so you would
2383 invoke the macro with a call such as
2385 \c myfunc: prologue 12
2387 which would expand to the three lines of code
2393 The number \c{1} after the macro name in the \c{%macro} line defines
2394 the number of parameters the macro \c{prologue} expects to receive.
2395 The use of \c{%1} inside the macro definition refers to the first
2396 parameter to the macro call. With a macro taking more than one
2397 parameter, subsequent parameters would be referred to as \c{%2},
2400 Multi-line macros, like single-line macros, are \i{case-sensitive},
2401 unless you define them using the alternative directive \c{%imacro}.
2403 If you need to pass a comma as \e{part} of a parameter to a
2404 multi-line macro, you can do that by enclosing the entire parameter
2405 in \I{braces, around macro parameters}braces. So you could code
2414 \c silly 'a', letter_a ; letter_a: db 'a'
2415 \c silly 'ab', string_ab ; string_ab: db 'ab'
2416 \c silly {13,10}, crlf ; crlf: db 13,10
2419 \#\S{mlrmacro} \i{Recursive Multi-Line Macros}: \I\c{%irmacro}\i\c{%rmacro}
2421 \#A multi-line macro cannot be referenced within itself, in order to
2422 \#prevent accidental infinite recursion.
2424 \#Recursive multi-line macros allow for self-referencing, with the
2425 \#caveat that the user is aware of the existence, use and purpose of
2426 \#recursive multi-line macros. There is also a generous, but sane, upper
2427 \#limit to the number of recursions, in order to prevent run-away memory
2428 \#consumption in case of accidental infinite recursion.
2430 \#As with non-recursive multi-line macros, recursive multi-line macros are
2431 \#\i{case-sensitive}, unless you define them using the alternative
2432 \#directive \c{%irmacro}.
2434 \S{mlmacover} Overloading Multi-Line Macros\I{overloading, multi-line macros}
2436 As with single-line macros, multi-line macros can be overloaded by
2437 defining the same macro name several times with different numbers of
2438 parameters. This time, no exception is made for macros with no
2439 parameters at all. So you could define
2441 \c %macro prologue 0
2448 to define an alternative form of the function prologue which
2449 allocates no local stack space.
2451 Sometimes, however, you might want to `overload' a machine
2452 instruction; for example, you might want to define
2461 so that you could code
2463 \c push ebx ; this line is not a macro call
2464 \c push eax,ecx ; but this one is
2466 Ordinarily, NASM will give a warning for the first of the above two
2467 lines, since \c{push} is now defined to be a macro, and is being
2468 invoked with a number of parameters for which no definition has been
2469 given. The correct code will still be generated, but the assembler
2470 will give a warning. This warning can be disabled by the use of the
2471 \c{-w-macro-params} command-line option (see \k{opt-w}).
2474 \S{maclocal} \i{Macro-Local Labels}
2476 NASM allows you to define labels within a multi-line macro
2477 definition in such a way as to make them local to the macro call: so
2478 calling the same macro multiple times will use a different label
2479 each time. You do this by prefixing \i\c{%%} to the label name. So
2480 you can invent an instruction which executes a \c{RET} if the \c{Z}
2481 flag is set by doing this:
2491 You can call this macro as many times as you want, and every time
2492 you call it NASM will make up a different `real' name to substitute
2493 for the label \c{%%skip}. The names NASM invents are of the form
2494 \c{..@2345.skip}, where the number 2345 changes with every macro
2495 call. The \i\c{..@} prefix prevents macro-local labels from
2496 interfering with the local label mechanism, as described in
2497 \k{locallab}. You should avoid defining your own labels in this form
2498 (the \c{..@} prefix, then a number, then another period) in case
2499 they interfere with macro-local labels.
2502 \S{mlmacgre} \i{Greedy Macro Parameters}
2504 Occasionally it is useful to define a macro which lumps its entire
2505 command line into one parameter definition, possibly after
2506 extracting one or two smaller parameters from the front. An example
2507 might be a macro to write a text string to a file in MS-DOS, where
2508 you might want to be able to write
2510 \c writefile [filehandle],"hello, world",13,10
2512 NASM allows you to define the last parameter of a macro to be
2513 \e{greedy}, meaning that if you invoke the macro with more
2514 parameters than it expects, all the spare parameters get lumped into
2515 the last defined one along with the separating commas. So if you
2518 \c %macro writefile 2+
2524 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
2531 then the example call to \c{writefile} above will work as expected:
2532 the text before the first comma, \c{[filehandle]}, is used as the
2533 first macro parameter and expanded when \c{%1} is referred to, and
2534 all the subsequent text is lumped into \c{%2} and placed after the
2537 The greedy nature of the macro is indicated to NASM by the use of
2538 the \I{+ modifier}\c{+} sign after the parameter count on the
2541 If you define a greedy macro, you are effectively telling NASM how
2542 it should expand the macro given \e{any} number of parameters from
2543 the actual number specified up to infinity; in this case, for
2544 example, NASM now knows what to do when it sees a call to
2545 \c{writefile} with 2, 3, 4 or more parameters. NASM will take this
2546 into account when overloading macros, and will not allow you to
2547 define another form of \c{writefile} taking 4 parameters (for
2550 Of course, the above macro could have been implemented as a
2551 non-greedy macro, in which case the call to it would have had to
2554 \c writefile [filehandle], {"hello, world",13,10}
2556 NASM provides both mechanisms for putting \i{commas in macro
2557 parameters}, and you choose which one you prefer for each macro
2560 See \k{sectmac} for a better way to write the above macro.
2562 \S{mlmacrange} \i{Macro Parameters Range}
2564 NASM allows you to expand parameters via special construction \c{%\{x:y\}}
2565 where \c{x} is the first parameter index and \c{y} is the last. Any index can
2566 be either negative or positive but must never be zero.
2576 expands to \c{3,4,5} range.
2578 Even more, the parameters can be reversed so that
2586 expands to \c{5,4,3} range.
2588 But even this is not the last. The parameters can be addressed via negative
2589 indices so NASM will count them reversed. The ones who know Python may see
2598 expands to \c{6,5,4} range.
2600 Note that NASM uses \i{comma} to separate parameters being expanded.
2602 By the way, here is a trick - you might use the index \c{%{-1:-1}}
2603 which gives you the \i{last} argument passed to a macro.
2605 \S{mlmacdef} \i{Default Macro Parameters}
2607 NASM also allows you to define a multi-line macro with a \e{range}
2608 of allowable parameter counts. If you do this, you can specify
2609 defaults for \i{omitted parameters}. So, for example:
2611 \c %macro die 0-1 "Painful program death has occurred."
2619 This macro (which makes use of the \c{writefile} macro defined in
2620 \k{mlmacgre}) can be called with an explicit error message, which it
2621 will display on the error output stream before exiting, or it can be
2622 called with no parameters, in which case it will use the default
2623 error message supplied in the macro definition.
2625 In general, you supply a minimum and maximum number of parameters
2626 for a macro of this type; the minimum number of parameters are then
2627 required in the macro call, and then you provide defaults for the
2628 optional ones. So if a macro definition began with the line
2630 \c %macro foobar 1-3 eax,[ebx+2]
2632 then it could be called with between one and three parameters, and
2633 \c{%1} would always be taken from the macro call. \c{%2}, if not
2634 specified by the macro call, would default to \c{eax}, and \c{%3} if
2635 not specified would default to \c{[ebx+2]}.
2637 You can provide extra information to a macro by providing
2638 too many default parameters:
2640 \c %macro quux 1 something
2642 This will trigger a warning by default; see \k{opt-w} for
2644 When \c{quux} is invoked, it receives not one but two parameters.
2645 \c{something} can be referred to as \c{%2}. The difference
2646 between passing \c{something} this way and writing \c{something}
2647 in the macro body is that with this way \c{something} is evaluated
2648 when the macro is defined, not when it is expanded.
2650 You may omit parameter defaults from the macro definition, in which
2651 case the parameter default is taken to be blank. This can be useful
2652 for macros which can take a variable number of parameters, since the
2653 \i\c{%0} token (see \k{percent0}) allows you to determine how many
2654 parameters were really passed to the macro call.
2656 This defaulting mechanism can be combined with the greedy-parameter
2657 mechanism; so the \c{die} macro above could be made more powerful,
2658 and more useful, by changing the first line of the definition to
2660 \c %macro die 0-1+ "Painful program death has occurred.",13,10
2662 The maximum parameter count can be infinite, denoted by \c{*}. In
2663 this case, of course, it is impossible to provide a \e{full} set of
2664 default parameters. Examples of this usage are shown in \k{rotate}.
2667 \S{percent0} \i\c{%0}: \I{counting macro parameters}Macro Parameter Counter
2669 The parameter reference \c{%0} will return a numeric constant giving the
2670 number of parameters received, that is, if \c{%0} is n then \c{%}n is the
2671 last parameter. \c{%0} is mostly useful for macros that can take a variable
2672 number of parameters. It can be used as an argument to \c{%rep}
2673 (see \k{rep}) in order to iterate through all the parameters of a macro.
2674 Examples are given in \k{rotate}.
2677 \S{rotate} \i\c{%rotate}: \i{Rotating Macro Parameters}
2679 Unix shell programmers will be familiar with the \I{shift
2680 command}\c{shift} shell command, which allows the arguments passed
2681 to a shell script (referenced as \c{$1}, \c{$2} and so on) to be
2682 moved left by one place, so that the argument previously referenced
2683 as \c{$2} becomes available as \c{$1}, and the argument previously
2684 referenced as \c{$1} is no longer available at all.
2686 NASM provides a similar mechanism, in the form of \c{%rotate}. As
2687 its name suggests, it differs from the Unix \c{shift} in that no
2688 parameters are lost: parameters rotated off the left end of the
2689 argument list reappear on the right, and vice versa.
2691 \c{%rotate} is invoked with a single numeric argument (which may be
2692 an expression). The macro parameters are rotated to the left by that
2693 many places. If the argument to \c{%rotate} is negative, the macro
2694 parameters are rotated to the right.
2696 \I{iterating over macro parameters}So a pair of macros to save and
2697 restore a set of registers might work as follows:
2699 \c %macro multipush 1-*
2708 This macro invokes the \c{PUSH} instruction on each of its arguments
2709 in turn, from left to right. It begins by pushing its first
2710 argument, \c{%1}, then invokes \c{%rotate} to move all the arguments
2711 one place to the left, so that the original second argument is now
2712 available as \c{%1}. Repeating this procedure as many times as there
2713 were arguments (achieved by supplying \c{%0} as the argument to
2714 \c{%rep}) causes each argument in turn to be pushed.
2716 Note also the use of \c{*} as the maximum parameter count,
2717 indicating that there is no upper limit on the number of parameters
2718 you may supply to the \i\c{multipush} macro.
2720 It would be convenient, when using this macro, to have a \c{POP}
2721 equivalent, which \e{didn't} require the arguments to be given in
2722 reverse order. Ideally, you would write the \c{multipush} macro
2723 call, then cut-and-paste the line to where the pop needed to be
2724 done, and change the name of the called macro to \c{multipop}, and
2725 the macro would take care of popping the registers in the opposite
2726 order from the one in which they were pushed.
2728 This can be done by the following definition:
2730 \c %macro multipop 1-*
2739 This macro begins by rotating its arguments one place to the
2740 \e{right}, so that the original \e{last} argument appears as \c{%1}.
2741 This is then popped, and the arguments are rotated right again, so
2742 the second-to-last argument becomes \c{%1}. Thus the arguments are
2743 iterated through in reverse order.
2746 \S{concat} \i{Concatenating Macro Parameters}
2748 NASM can concatenate macro parameters and macro indirection constructs
2749 on to other text surrounding them. This allows you to declare a family
2750 of symbols, for example, in a macro definition. If, for example, you
2751 wanted to generate a table of key codes along with offsets into the
2752 table, you could code something like
2754 \c %macro keytab_entry 2
2756 \c keypos%1 equ $-keytab
2762 \c keytab_entry F1,128+1
2763 \c keytab_entry F2,128+2
2764 \c keytab_entry Return,13
2766 which would expand to
2769 \c keyposF1 equ $-keytab
2771 \c keyposF2 equ $-keytab
2773 \c keyposReturn equ $-keytab
2776 You can just as easily concatenate text on to the other end of a
2777 macro parameter, by writing \c{%1foo}.
2779 If you need to append a \e{digit} to a macro parameter, for example
2780 defining labels \c{foo1} and \c{foo2} when passed the parameter
2781 \c{foo}, you can't code \c{%11} because that would be taken as the
2782 eleventh macro parameter. Instead, you must code
2783 \I{braces, after % sign}\c{%\{1\}1}, which will separate the first
2784 \c{1} (giving the number of the macro parameter) from the second
2785 (literal text to be concatenated to the parameter).
2787 This concatenation can also be applied to other preprocessor in-line
2788 objects, such as macro-local labels (\k{maclocal}) and context-local
2789 labels (\k{ctxlocal}). In all cases, ambiguities in syntax can be
2790 resolved by enclosing everything after the \c{%} sign and before the
2791 literal text in braces: so \c{%\{%foo\}bar} concatenates the text
2792 \c{bar} to the end of the real name of the macro-local label
2793 \c{%%foo}. (This is unnecessary, since the form NASM uses for the
2794 real names of macro-local labels means that the two usages
2795 \c{%\{%foo\}bar} and \c{%%foobar} would both expand to the same
2796 thing anyway; nevertheless, the capability is there.)
2798 The single-line macro indirection construct, \c{%[...]}
2799 (\k{indmacro}), behaves the same way as macro parameters for the
2800 purpose of concatenation.
2802 See also the \c{%+} operator, \k{concat%+}.
2805 \S{mlmaccc} \i{Condition Codes as Macro Parameters}
2807 NASM can give special treatment to a macro parameter which contains
2808 a condition code. For a start, you can refer to the macro parameter
2809 \c{%1} by means of the alternative syntax \i\c{%+1}, which informs
2810 NASM that this macro parameter is supposed to contain a condition
2811 code, and will cause the preprocessor to report an error message if
2812 the macro is called with a parameter which is \e{not} a valid
2815 Far more usefully, though, you can refer to the macro parameter by
2816 means of \i\c{%-1}, which NASM will expand as the \e{inverse}
2817 condition code. So the \c{retz} macro defined in \k{maclocal} can be
2818 replaced by a general \i{conditional-return macro} like this:
2828 This macro can now be invoked using calls like \c{retc ne}, which
2829 will cause the conditional-jump instruction in the macro expansion
2830 to come out as \c{JE}, or \c{retc po} which will make the jump a
2833 The \c{%+1} macro-parameter reference is quite happy to interpret
2834 the arguments \c{CXZ} and \c{ECXZ} as valid condition codes;
2835 however, \c{%-1} will report an error if passed either of these,
2836 because no inverse condition code exists.
2839 \S{nolist} \i{Disabling Listing Expansion}\I\c{.nolist}
2841 When NASM is generating a listing file from your program, it will
2842 generally expand multi-line macros by means of writing the macro
2843 call and then listing each line of the expansion. This allows you to
2844 see which instructions in the macro expansion are generating what
2845 code; however, for some macros this clutters the listing up
2848 NASM therefore provides the \c{.nolist} qualifier, which you can
2849 include in a macro definition to inhibit the expansion of the macro
2850 in the listing file. The \c{.nolist} qualifier comes directly after
2851 the number of parameters, like this:
2853 \c %macro foo 1.nolist
2857 \c %macro bar 1-5+.nolist a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h
2859 \S{unmacro} Undefining Multi-Line Macros: \i\c{%unmacro}
2861 Multi-line macros can be removed with the \c{%unmacro} directive.
2862 Unlike the \c{%undef} directive, however, \c{%unmacro} takes an
2863 argument specification, and will only remove \i{exact matches} with
2864 that argument specification.
2873 removes the previously defined macro \c{foo}, but
2880 does \e{not} remove the macro \c{bar}, since the argument
2881 specification does not match exactly.
2884 \#\S{exitmacro} Exiting Multi-Line Macros: \i\c{%exitmacro}
2886 \#Multi-line macro expansions can be arbitrarily terminated with
2887 \#the \c{%exitmacro} directive.
2899 \H{condasm} \i{Conditional Assembly}\I\c{%if}
2901 Similarly to the C preprocessor, NASM allows sections of a source
2902 file to be assembled only if certain conditions are met. The general
2903 syntax of this feature looks like this:
2906 \c ; some code which only appears if <condition> is met
2907 \c %elif<condition2>
2908 \c ; only appears if <condition> is not met but <condition2> is
2910 \c ; this appears if neither <condition> nor <condition2> was met
2913 The inverse forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn} are also supported.
2915 The \i\c{%else} clause is optional, as is the \i\c{%elif} clause.
2916 You can have more than one \c{%elif} clause as well.
2918 There are a number of variants of the \c{%if} directive. Each has its
2919 corresponding \c{%elif}, \c{%ifn}, and \c{%elifn} directives; for
2920 example, the equivalents to the \c{%ifdef} directive are \c{%elifdef},
2921 \c{%ifndef}, and \c{%elifndef}.
2923 \S{ifdef} \i\c{%ifdef}: Testing Single-Line Macro Existence\I{testing,
2924 single-line macro existence}
2926 Beginning a conditional-assembly block with the line \c{%ifdef
2927 MACRO} will assemble the subsequent code if, and only if, a
2928 single-line macro called \c{MACRO} is defined. If not, then the
2929 \c{%elif} and \c{%else} blocks (if any) will be processed instead.
2931 For example, when debugging a program, you might want to write code
2934 \c ; perform some function
2936 \c writefile 2,"Function performed successfully",13,10
2938 \c ; go and do something else
2940 Then you could use the command-line option \c{-dDEBUG} to create a
2941 version of the program which produced debugging messages, and remove
2942 the option to generate the final release version of the program.
2944 You can test for a macro \e{not} being defined by using
2945 \i\c{%ifndef} instead of \c{%ifdef}. You can also test for macro
2946 definitions in \c{%elif} blocks by using \i\c{%elifdef} and
2950 \S{ifmacro} \i\c{%ifmacro}: Testing Multi-Line Macro
2951 Existence\I{testing, multi-line macro existence}
2953 The \c{%ifmacro} directive operates in the same way as the \c{%ifdef}
2954 directive, except that it checks for the existence of a multi-line macro.
2956 For example, you may be working with a large project and not have control
2957 over the macros in a library. You may want to create a macro with one
2958 name if it doesn't already exist, and another name if one with that name
2961 The \c{%ifmacro} is considered true if defining a macro with the given name
2962 and number of arguments would cause a definitions conflict. For example:
2964 \c %ifmacro MyMacro 1-3
2966 \c %error "MyMacro 1-3" causes a conflict with an existing macro.
2970 \c %macro MyMacro 1-3
2972 \c ; insert code to define the macro
2978 This will create the macro "MyMacro 1-3" if no macro already exists which
2979 would conflict with it, and emits a warning if there would be a definition
2982 You can test for the macro not existing by using the \i\c{%ifnmacro} instead
2983 of \c{%ifmacro}. Additional tests can be performed in \c{%elif} blocks by using
2984 \i\c{%elifmacro} and \i\c{%elifnmacro}.
2987 \S{ifctx} \i\c{%ifctx}: Testing the Context Stack\I{testing, context
2990 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%ifctx} will cause the
2991 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the top context on
2992 the preprocessor's context stack has the same name as one of the arguments.
2993 As with \c{%ifdef}, the inverse and \c{%elif} forms \i\c{%ifnctx},
2994 \i\c{%elifctx} and \i\c{%elifnctx} are also supported.
2996 For more details of the context stack, see \k{ctxstack}. For a
2997 sample use of \c{%ifctx}, see \k{blockif}.
3000 \S{if} \i\c{%if}: Testing Arbitrary Numeric Expressions\I{testing,
3001 arbitrary numeric expressions}
3003 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%if expr} will cause the
3004 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the value of the
3005 numeric expression \c{expr} is non-zero. An example of the use of
3006 this feature is in deciding when to break out of a \c{%rep}
3007 preprocessor loop: see \k{rep} for a detailed example.
3009 The expression given to \c{%if}, and its counterpart \i\c{%elif}, is
3010 a critical expression (see \k{crit}).
3012 \c{%if} extends the normal NASM expression syntax, by providing a
3013 set of \i{relational operators} which are not normally available in
3014 expressions. The operators \i\c{=}, \i\c{<}, \i\c{>}, \i\c{<=},
3015 \i\c{>=} and \i\c{<>} test equality, less-than, greater-than,
3016 less-or-equal, greater-or-equal and not-equal respectively. The
3017 C-like forms \i\c{==} and \i\c{!=} are supported as alternative
3018 forms of \c{=} and \c{<>}. In addition, low-priority logical
3019 operators \i\c{&&}, \i\c{^^} and \i\c{||} are provided, supplying
3020 \i{logical AND}, \i{logical XOR} and \i{logical OR}. These work like
3021 the C logical operators (although C has no logical XOR), in that
3022 they always return either 0 or 1, and treat any non-zero input as 1
3023 (so that \c{^^}, for example, returns 1 if exactly one of its inputs
3024 is zero, and 0 otherwise). The relational operators also return 1
3025 for true and 0 for false.
3027 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%if} has a counterpart
3028 \i\c{%elif}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn}.
3030 \S{ifidn} \i\c{%ifidn} and \i\c{%ifidni}: Testing Exact Text
3031 Identity\I{testing, exact text identity}
3033 The construct \c{%ifidn text1,text2} will cause the subsequent code
3034 to be assembled if and only if \c{text1} and \c{text2}, after
3035 expanding single-line macros, are identical pieces of text.
3036 Differences in white space are not counted.
3038 \c{%ifidni} is similar to \c{%ifidn}, but is \i{case-insensitive}.
3040 For example, the following macro pushes a register or number on the
3041 stack, and allows you to treat \c{IP} as a real register:
3043 \c %macro pushparam 1
3054 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%ifidn} has a counterpart
3055 \i\c{%elifidn}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifnidn} and \i\c{%elifnidn}.
3056 Similarly, \c{%ifidni} has counterparts \i\c{%elifidni},
3057 \i\c{%ifnidni} and \i\c{%elifnidni}.
3059 \S{iftyp} \i\c{%ifid}, \i\c{%ifnum}, \i\c{%ifstr}: Testing Token
3060 Types\I{testing, token types}
3062 Some macros will want to perform different tasks depending on
3063 whether they are passed a number, a string, or an identifier. For
3064 example, a string output macro might want to be able to cope with
3065 being passed either a string constant or a pointer to an existing
3068 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifid}, taking one parameter
3069 (which may be blank), assembles the subsequent code if and only if
3070 the first token in the parameter exists and is an identifier.
3071 \c{%ifnum} works similarly, but tests for the token being a numeric
3072 constant; \c{%ifstr} tests for it being a string.
3074 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
3075 extended to take advantage of \c{%ifstr} in the following fashion:
3077 \c %macro writefile 2-3+
3086 \c %%endstr: mov dx,%%str
3087 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
3098 Then the \c{writefile} macro can cope with being called in either of
3099 the following two ways:
3101 \c writefile [file], strpointer, length
3102 \c writefile [file], "hello", 13, 10
3104 In the first, \c{strpointer} is used as the address of an
3105 already-declared string, and \c{length} is used as its length; in
3106 the second, a string is given to the macro, which therefore declares
3107 it itself and works out the address and length for itself.
3109 Note the use of \c{%if} inside the \c{%ifstr}: this is to detect
3110 whether the macro was passed two arguments (so the string would be a
3111 single string constant, and \c{db %2} would be adequate) or more (in
3112 which case, all but the first two would be lumped together into
3113 \c{%3}, and \c{db %2,%3} would be required).
3115 The usual \I\c{%elifid}\I\c{%elifnum}\I\c{%elifstr}\c{%elif}...,
3116 \I\c{%ifnid}\I\c{%ifnnum}\I\c{%ifnstr}\c{%ifn}..., and
3117 \I\c{%elifnid}\I\c{%elifnnum}\I\c{%elifnstr}\c{%elifn}... versions
3118 exist for each of \c{%ifid}, \c{%ifnum} and \c{%ifstr}.
3120 \S{iftoken} \i\c{%iftoken}: Test for a Single Token
3122 Some macros will want to do different things depending on if it is
3123 passed a single token (e.g. paste it to something else using \c{%+})
3124 versus a multi-token sequence.
3126 The conditional assembly construct \c{%iftoken} assembles the
3127 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters consist of
3128 exactly one token, possibly surrounded by whitespace.
3134 will assemble the subsequent code, but
3138 will not, since \c{-1} contains two tokens: the unary minus operator
3139 \c{-}, and the number \c{1}.
3141 The usual \i\c{%eliftoken}, \i\c\{%ifntoken}, and \i\c{%elifntoken}
3142 variants are also provided.
3144 \S{ifempty} \i\c{%ifempty}: Test for Empty Expansion
3146 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifempty} assembles the
3147 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters do not contain
3148 any tokens at all, whitespace excepted.
3150 The usual \i\c{%elifempty}, \i\c\{%ifnempty}, and \i\c{%elifnempty}
3151 variants are also provided.
3153 \S{ifenv} \i\c{%ifenv}: Test If Environment Variable Exists
3155 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifenv} assembles the
3156 subsequent code if and only if the environment variable referenced by
3157 the \c{%!<env>} directive exists.
3159 The usual \i\c{%elifenv}, \i\c\{%ifnenv}, and \i\c{%elifnenv}
3160 variants are also provided.
3162 Just as for \c{%!<env>} the argument should be written as a string if
3163 it contains characters that would not be legal in an identifier. See
3166 \H{rep} \i{Preprocessor Loops}\I{repeating code}: \i\c{%rep}
3168 NASM's \c{TIMES} prefix, though useful, cannot be used to invoke a
3169 multi-line macro multiple times, because it is processed by NASM
3170 after macros have already been expanded. Therefore NASM provides
3171 another form of loop, this time at the preprocessor level: \c{%rep}.
3173 The directives \c{%rep} and \i\c{%endrep} (\c{%rep} takes a numeric
3174 argument, which can be an expression; \c{%endrep} takes no
3175 arguments) can be used to enclose a chunk of code, which is then
3176 replicated as many times as specified by the preprocessor:
3180 \c inc word [table+2*i]
3184 This will generate a sequence of 64 \c{INC} instructions,
3185 incrementing every word of memory from \c{[table]} to
3188 For more complex termination conditions, or to break out of a repeat
3189 loop part way along, you can use the \i\c{%exitrep} directive to
3190 terminate the loop, like this:
3205 \c fib_number equ ($-fibonacci)/2
3207 This produces a list of all the Fibonacci numbers that will fit in
3208 16 bits. Note that a maximum repeat count must still be given to
3209 \c{%rep}. This is to prevent the possibility of NASM getting into an
3210 infinite loop in the preprocessor, which (on multitasking or
3211 multi-user systems) would typically cause all the system memory to
3212 be gradually used up and other applications to start crashing.
3215 \H{files} Source Files and Dependencies
3217 These commands allow you to split your sources into multiple files.
3219 \S{include} \i\c{%include}: \i{Including Other Files}
3221 Using, once again, a very similar syntax to the C preprocessor,
3222 NASM's preprocessor lets you include other source files into your
3223 code. This is done by the use of the \i\c{%include} directive:
3225 \c %include "macros.mac"
3227 will include the contents of the file \c{macros.mac} into the source
3228 file containing the \c{%include} directive.
3230 Include files are \I{searching for include files}searched for in the
3231 current directory (the directory you're in when you run NASM, as
3232 opposed to the location of the NASM executable or the location of
3233 the source file), plus any directories specified on the NASM command
3234 line using the \c{-i} option.
3236 The standard C idiom for preventing a file being included more than
3237 once is just as applicable in NASM: if the file \c{macros.mac} has
3240 \c %ifndef MACROS_MAC
3241 \c %define MACROS_MAC
3242 \c ; now define some macros
3245 then including the file more than once will not cause errors,
3246 because the second time the file is included nothing will happen
3247 because the macro \c{MACROS_MAC} will already be defined.
3249 You can force a file to be included even if there is no \c{%include}
3250 directive that explicitly includes it, by using the \i\c{-p} option
3251 on the NASM command line (see \k{opt-p}).
3254 \S{pathsearch} \i\c{%pathsearch}: Search the Include Path
3256 The \c{%pathsearch} directive takes a single-line macro name and a
3257 filename, and declare or redefines the specified single-line macro to
3258 be the include-path-resolved version of the filename, if the file
3259 exists (otherwise, it is passed unchanged.)
3263 \c %pathsearch MyFoo "foo.bin"
3265 ... with \c{-Ibins/} in the include path may end up defining the macro
3266 \c{MyFoo} to be \c{"bins/foo.bin"}.
3269 \S{depend} \i\c{%depend}: Add Dependent Files
3271 The \c{%depend} directive takes a filename and adds it to the list of
3272 files to be emitted as dependency generation when the \c{-M} options
3273 and its relatives (see \k{opt-M}) are used. It produces no output.
3275 This is generally used in conjunction with \c{%pathsearch}. For
3276 example, a simplified version of the standard macro wrapper for the
3277 \c{INCBIN} directive looks like:
3279 \c %imacro incbin 1-2+ 0
3280 \c %pathsearch dep %1
3285 This first resolves the location of the file into the macro \c{dep},
3286 then adds it to the dependency lists, and finally issues the
3287 assembler-level \c{INCBIN} directive.
3290 \S{use} \i\c{%use}: Include Standard Macro Package
3292 The \c{%use} directive is similar to \c{%include}, but rather than
3293 including the contents of a file, it includes a named standard macro
3294 package. The standard macro packages are part of NASM, and are
3295 described in \k{macropkg}.
3297 Unlike the \c{%include} directive, package names for the \c{%use}
3298 directive do not require quotes, but quotes are permitted. In NASM
3299 2.04 and 2.05 the unquoted form would be macro-expanded; this is no
3300 longer true. Thus, the following lines are equivalent:
3305 Standard macro packages are protected from multiple inclusion. When a
3306 standard macro package is used, a testable single-line macro of the
3307 form \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is also defined, see \k{use_def}.
3309 \H{ctxstack} The \i{Context Stack}
3311 Having labels that are local to a macro definition is sometimes not
3312 quite powerful enough: sometimes you want to be able to share labels
3313 between several macro calls. An example might be a \c{REPEAT} ...
3314 \c{UNTIL} loop, in which the expansion of the \c{REPEAT} macro
3315 would need to be able to refer to a label which the \c{UNTIL} macro
3316 had defined. However, for such a macro you would also want to be
3317 able to nest these loops.
3319 NASM provides this level of power by means of a \e{context stack}.
3320 The preprocessor maintains a stack of \e{contexts}, each of which is
3321 characterized by a name. You add a new context to the stack using
3322 the \i\c{%push} directive, and remove one using \i\c{%pop}. You can
3323 define labels that are local to a particular context on the stack.
3326 \S{pushpop} \i\c{%push} and \i\c{%pop}: \I{creating
3327 contexts}\I{removing contexts}Creating and Removing Contexts
3329 The \c{%push} directive is used to create a new context and place it
3330 on the top of the context stack. \c{%push} takes an optional argument,
3331 which is the name of the context. For example:
3335 This pushes a new context called \c{foobar} on the stack. You can have
3336 several contexts on the stack with the same name: they can still be
3337 distinguished. If no name is given, the context is unnamed (this is
3338 normally used when both the \c{%push} and the \c{%pop} are inside a
3339 single macro definition.)
3341 The directive \c{%pop}, taking one optional argument, removes the top
3342 context from the context stack and destroys it, along with any
3343 labels associated with it. If an argument is given, it must match the
3344 name of the current context, otherwise it will issue an error.
3347 \S{ctxlocal} \i{Context-Local Labels}
3349 Just as the usage \c{%%foo} defines a label which is local to the
3350 particular macro call in which it is used, the usage \I{%$}\c{%$foo}
3351 is used to define a label which is local to the context on the top
3352 of the context stack. So the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} example given
3353 above could be implemented by means of:
3369 and invoked by means of, for example,
3377 which would scan every fourth byte of a string in search of the byte
3380 If you need to define, or access, labels local to the context
3381 \e{below} the top one on the stack, you can use \I{%$$}\c{%$$foo}, or
3382 \c{%$$$foo} for the context below that, and so on.
3385 \S{ctxdefine} \i{Context-Local Single-Line Macros}
3387 NASM also allows you to define single-line macros which are local to
3388 a particular context, in just the same way:
3390 \c %define %$localmac 3
3392 will define the single-line macro \c{%$localmac} to be local to the
3393 top context on the stack. Of course, after a subsequent \c{%push},
3394 it can then still be accessed by the name \c{%$$localmac}.
3397 \S{ctxrepl} \i\c{%repl}: \I{renaming contexts}Renaming a Context
3399 If you need to change the name of the top context on the stack (in
3400 order, for example, to have it respond differently to \c{%ifctx}),
3401 you can execute a \c{%pop} followed by a \c{%push}; but this will
3402 have the side effect of destroying all context-local labels and
3403 macros associated with the context that was just popped.
3405 NASM provides the directive \c{%repl}, which \e{replaces} a context
3406 with a different name, without touching the associated macros and
3407 labels. So you could replace the destructive code
3412 with the non-destructive version \c{%repl newname}.
3415 \S{blockif} Example Use of the \i{Context Stack}: \i{Block IFs}
3417 This example makes use of almost all the context-stack features,
3418 including the conditional-assembly construct \i\c{%ifctx}, to
3419 implement a block IF statement as a set of macros.
3435 \c %error "expected `if' before `else'"
3449 \c %error "expected `if' or `else' before `endif'"
3454 This code is more robust than the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} macros
3455 given in \k{ctxlocal}, because it uses conditional assembly to check
3456 that the macros are issued in the right order (for example, not
3457 calling \c{endif} before \c{if}) and issues a \c{%error} if they're
3460 In addition, the \c{endif} macro has to be able to cope with the two
3461 distinct cases of either directly following an \c{if}, or following
3462 an \c{else}. It achieves this, again, by using conditional assembly
3463 to do different things depending on whether the context on top of
3464 the stack is \c{if} or \c{else}.
3466 The \c{else} macro has to preserve the context on the stack, in
3467 order to have the \c{%$ifnot} referred to by the \c{if} macro be the
3468 same as the one defined by the \c{endif} macro, but has to change
3469 the context's name so that \c{endif} will know there was an
3470 intervening \c{else}. It does this by the use of \c{%repl}.
3472 A sample usage of these macros might look like:
3494 The block-\c{IF} macros handle nesting quite happily, by means of
3495 pushing another context, describing the inner \c{if}, on top of the
3496 one describing the outer \c{if}; thus \c{else} and \c{endif} always
3497 refer to the last unmatched \c{if} or \c{else}.
3500 \H{stackrel} \i{Stack Relative Preprocessor Directives}
3502 The following preprocessor directives provide a way to use
3503 labels to refer to local variables allocated on the stack.
3505 \b\c{%arg} (see \k{arg})
3507 \b\c{%stacksize} (see \k{stacksize})
3509 \b\c{%local} (see \k{local})
3512 \S{arg} \i\c{%arg} Directive
3514 The \c{%arg} directive is used to simplify the handling of
3515 parameters passed on the stack. Stack based parameter passing
3516 is used by many high level languages, including C, C++ and Pascal.
3518 While NASM has macros which attempt to duplicate this
3519 functionality (see \k{16cmacro}), the syntax is not particularly
3520 convenient to use and is not TASM compatible. Here is an example
3521 which shows the use of \c{%arg} without any external macros:
3525 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3526 \c %stacksize large ; tell NASM to use bp
3527 \c %arg i:word, j_ptr:word
3534 \c %pop ; restore original context
3536 This is similar to the procedure defined in \k{16cmacro} and adds
3537 the value in i to the value pointed to by j_ptr and returns the
3538 sum in the ax register. See \k{pushpop} for an explanation of
3539 \c{push} and \c{pop} and the use of context stacks.
3542 \S{stacksize} \i\c{%stacksize} Directive
3544 The \c{%stacksize} directive is used in conjunction with the
3545 \c{%arg} (see \k{arg}) and the \c{%local} (see \k{local}) directives.
3546 It tells NASM the default size to use for subsequent \c{%arg} and
3547 \c{%local} directives. The \c{%stacksize} directive takes one
3548 required argument which is one of \c{flat}, \c{flat64}, \c{large} or \c{small}.
3552 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3553 relative to \c{ebp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3554 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{eip} is on the stack).
3556 \c %stacksize flat64
3558 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3559 relative to \c{rbp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3560 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{rip} is on the stack).
3564 This form uses \c{bp} to do stack-based parameter addressing and
3565 assumes that a far form of call was used to get to this address
3566 (i.e. that \c{ip} and \c{cs} are on the stack).
3570 This form also uses \c{bp} to address stack parameters, but it is
3571 different from \c{large} because it also assumes that the old value
3572 of bp is pushed onto the stack (i.e. it expects an \c{ENTER}
3573 instruction). In other words, it expects that \c{bp}, \c{ip} and
3574 \c{cs} are on the top of the stack, underneath any local space which
3575 may have been allocated by \c{ENTER}. This form is probably most
3576 useful when used in combination with the \c{%local} directive
3580 \S{local} \i\c{%local} Directive
3582 The \c{%local} directive is used to simplify the use of local
3583 temporary stack variables allocated in a stack frame. Automatic
3584 local variables in C are an example of this kind of variable. The
3585 \c{%local} directive is most useful when used with the \c{%stacksize}
3586 (see \k{stacksize} and is also compatible with the \c{%arg} directive
3587 (see \k{arg}). It allows simplified reference to variables on the
3588 stack which have been allocated typically by using the \c{ENTER}
3590 \# (see \k{insENTER} for a description of that instruction).
3591 An example of its use is the following:
3595 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3596 \c %stacksize small ; tell NASM to use bp
3597 \c %assign %$localsize 0 ; see text for explanation
3598 \c %local old_ax:word, old_dx:word
3600 \c enter %$localsize,0 ; see text for explanation
3601 \c mov [old_ax],ax ; swap ax & bx
3602 \c mov [old_dx],dx ; and swap dx & cx
3607 \c leave ; restore old bp
3610 \c %pop ; restore original context
3612 The \c{%$localsize} variable is used internally by the
3613 \c{%local} directive and \e{must} be defined within the
3614 current context before the \c{%local} directive may be used.
3615 Failure to do so will result in one expression syntax error for
3616 each \c{%local} variable declared. It then may be used in
3617 the construction of an appropriately sized ENTER instruction
3618 as shown in the example.
3621 \H{pperror} Reporting \i{User-Defined Errors}: \i\c{%error}, \i\c{%warning}, \i\c{%fatal}
3623 The preprocessor directive \c{%error} will cause NASM to report an
3624 error if it occurs in assembled code. So if other users are going to
3625 try to assemble your source files, you can ensure that they define the
3626 right macros by means of code like this:
3631 \c ; do some different setup
3633 \c %error "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined."
3636 Then any user who fails to understand the way your code is supposed
3637 to be assembled will be quickly warned of their mistake, rather than
3638 having to wait until the program crashes on being run and then not
3639 knowing what went wrong.
3641 Similarly, \c{%warning} issues a warning, but allows assembly to continue:
3646 \c ; do some different setup
3648 \c %warning "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined, assuming F1."
3652 \c{%error} and \c{%warning} are issued only on the final assembly
3653 pass. This makes them safe to use in conjunction with tests that
3654 depend on symbol values.
3656 \c{%fatal} terminates assembly immediately, regardless of pass. This
3657 is useful when there is no point in continuing the assembly further,
3658 and doing so is likely just going to cause a spew of confusing error
3661 It is optional for the message string after \c{%error}, \c{%warning}
3662 or \c{%fatal} to be quoted. If it is \e{not}, then single-line macros
3663 are expanded in it, which can be used to display more information to
3664 the user. For example:
3667 \c %assign foo_over foo-64
3668 \c %error foo is foo_over bytes too large
3672 \H{otherpreproc} \i{Other Preprocessor Directives}
3674 NASM also has preprocessor directives which allow access to
3675 information from external sources. Currently they include:
3677 \b\c{%line} enables NASM to correctly handle the output of another
3678 preprocessor (see \k{line}).
3680 \b\c{%!} enables NASM to read in the value of an environment variable,
3681 which can then be used in your program (see \k{getenv}).
3683 \S{line} \i\c{%line} Directive
3685 The \c{%line} directive is used to notify NASM that the input line
3686 corresponds to a specific line number in another file. Typically
3687 this other file would be an original source file, with the current
3688 NASM input being the output of a pre-processor. The \c{%line}
3689 directive allows NASM to output messages which indicate the line
3690 number of the original source file, instead of the file that is being
3693 This preprocessor directive is not generally of use to programmers,
3694 by may be of interest to preprocessor authors. The usage of the
3695 \c{%line} preprocessor directive is as follows:
3697 \c %line nnn[+mmm] [filename]
3699 In this directive, \c{nnn} identifies the line of the original source
3700 file which this line corresponds to. \c{mmm} is an optional parameter
3701 which specifies a line increment value; each line of the input file
3702 read in is considered to correspond to \c{mmm} lines of the original
3703 source file. Finally, \c{filename} is an optional parameter which
3704 specifies the file name of the original source file.
3706 After reading a \c{%line} preprocessor directive, NASM will report
3707 all file name and line numbers relative to the values specified
3711 \S{getenv} \i\c{%!}\c{<env>}: Read an environment variable.
3713 The \c{%!<env>} directive makes it possible to read the value of an
3714 environment variable at assembly time. This could, for example, be used
3715 to store the contents of an environment variable into a string, which
3716 could be used at some other point in your code.
3718 For example, suppose that you have an environment variable \c{FOO}, and
3719 you want the contents of \c{FOO} to be embedded in your program. You
3720 could do that as follows:
3722 \c %defstr FOO %!FOO
3724 See \k{defstr} for notes on the \c{%defstr} directive.
3726 If the name of the environment variable contains non-identifier
3727 characters, you can use string quotes to surround the name of the
3728 variable, for example:
3730 \c %defstr C_colon %!'C:'
3733 \H{stdmac} \i{Standard Macros}
3735 NASM defines a set of standard macros, which are already defined
3736 when it starts to process any source file. If you really need a
3737 program to be assembled with no pre-defined macros, you can use the
3738 \i\c{%clear} directive to empty the preprocessor of everything but
3739 context-local preprocessor variables and single-line macros.
3741 Most \i{user-level assembler directives} (see \k{directive}) are
3742 implemented as macros which invoke primitive directives; these are
3743 described in \k{directive}. The rest of the standard macro set is
3747 \S{stdmacver} \i{NASM Version} Macros
3749 The single-line macros \i\c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \i\c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3750 \i\c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \i\c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} expand to the
3751 major, minor, subminor and patch level parts of the \i{version
3752 number of NASM} being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32p1 for
3753 example, \c{__NASM_MAJOR__} would be defined to be 0, \c{__NASM_MINOR__}
3754 would be defined as 98, \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} would be defined to 32,
3755 and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} would be defined as 1.
3757 Additionally, the macro \i\c{__NASM_SNAPSHOT__} is defined for
3758 automatically generated snapshot releases \e{only}.
3761 \S{stdmacverid} \i\c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__}: \i{NASM Version ID}
3763 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__} expands to a dword integer
3764 representing the full version number of the version of nasm being used.
3765 The value is the equivalent to \c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3766 \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} concatenated to
3767 produce a single doubleword. Hence, for 0.98.32p1, the returned number
3768 would be equivalent to:
3776 Note that the above lines are generate exactly the same code, the second
3777 line is used just to give an indication of the order that the separate
3778 values will be present in memory.
3781 \S{stdmacverstr} \i\c{__NASM_VER__}: \i{NASM Version string}
3783 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VER__} expands to a string which defines
3784 the version number of nasm being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32 for example,
3793 \S{fileline} \i\c{__FILE__} and \i\c{__LINE__}: File Name and Line Number
3795 Like the C preprocessor, NASM allows the user to find out the file
3796 name and line number containing the current instruction. The macro
3797 \c{__FILE__} expands to a string constant giving the name of the
3798 current input file (which may change through the course of assembly
3799 if \c{%include} directives are used), and \c{__LINE__} expands to a
3800 numeric constant giving the current line number in the input file.
3802 These macros could be used, for example, to communicate debugging
3803 information to a macro, since invoking \c{__LINE__} inside a macro
3804 definition (either single-line or multi-line) will return the line
3805 number of the macro \e{call}, rather than \e{definition}. So to
3806 determine where in a piece of code a crash is occurring, for
3807 example, one could write a routine \c{stillhere}, which is passed a
3808 line number in \c{EAX} and outputs something like `line 155: still
3809 here'. You could then write a macro
3811 \c %macro notdeadyet 0
3820 and then pepper your code with calls to \c{notdeadyet} until you
3821 find the crash point.
3824 \S{bitsm} \i\c{__BITS__}: Current BITS Mode
3826 The \c{__BITS__} standard macro is updated every time that the BITS mode is
3827 set using the \c{BITS XX} or \c{[BITS XX]} directive, where XX is a valid mode
3828 number of 16, 32 or 64. \c{__BITS__} receives the specified mode number and
3829 makes it globally available. This can be very useful for those who utilize
3830 mode-dependent macros.
3832 \S{ofmtm} \i\c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__}: Current Output Format
3834 The \c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__} standard macro holds the current Output Format,
3835 as given by the \c{-f} option or NASM's default. Type \c{nasm -hf} for a
3838 \c %ifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, win32
3839 \c %define NEWLINE 13, 10
3840 \c %elifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, elf32
3841 \c %define NEWLINE 10
3845 \S{datetime} Assembly Date and Time Macros
3847 NASM provides a variety of macros that represent the timestamp of the
3850 \b The \i\c{__DATE__} and \i\c{__TIME__} macros give the assembly date and
3851 time as strings, in ISO 8601 format (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"},
3854 \b The \i\c{__DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__TIME_NUM__} macros give the assembly
3855 date and time in numeric form; in the format \c{YYYYMMDD} and
3856 \c{HHMMSS} respectively.
3858 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME__} macros give the assembly
3859 date and time in universal time (UTC) as strings, in ISO 8601 format
3860 (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"}, respectively.) If the host
3861 platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are undefined.
3863 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME_NUM__} macros give the
3864 assembly date and time universal time (UTC) in numeric form; in the
3865 format \c{YYYYMMDD} and \c{HHMMSS} respectively. If the
3866 host platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are
3869 \b The \c{__POSIX_TIME__} macro is defined as a number containing the
3870 number of seconds since the POSIX epoch, 1 January 1970 00:00:00 UTC;
3871 excluding any leap seconds. This is computed using UTC time if
3872 available on the host platform, otherwise it is computed using the
3873 local time as if it was UTC.
3875 All instances of time and date macros in the same assembly session
3876 produce consistent output. For example, in an assembly session
3877 started at 42 seconds after midnight on January 1, 2010 in Moscow
3878 (timezone UTC+3) these macros would have the following values,
3879 assuming, of course, a properly configured environment with a correct
3882 \c __DATE__ "2010-01-01"
3883 \c __TIME__ "00:00:42"
3884 \c __DATE_NUM__ 20100101
3885 \c __TIME_NUM__ 000042
3886 \c __UTC_DATE__ "2009-12-31"
3887 \c __UTC_TIME__ "21:00:42"
3888 \c __UTC_DATE_NUM__ 20091231
3889 \c __UTC_TIME_NUM__ 210042
3890 \c __POSIX_TIME__ 1262293242
3893 \S{use_def} \I\c{__USE_*__}\c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__}: Package
3896 When a standard macro package (see \k{macropkg}) is included with the
3897 \c{%use} directive (see \k{use}), a single-line macro of the form
3898 \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is automatically defined. This allows
3899 testing if a particular package is invoked or not.
3901 For example, if the \c{altreg} package is included (see
3902 \k{pkg_altreg}), then the macro \c{__USE_ALTREG__} is defined.
3905 \S{pass_macro} \i\c{__PASS__}: Assembly Pass
3907 The macro \c{__PASS__} is defined to be \c{1} on preparatory passes,
3908 and \c{2} on the final pass. In preprocess-only mode, it is set to
3909 \c{3}, and when running only to generate dependencies (due to the
3910 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} option, see \k{opt-M}) it is set to \c{0}.
3912 \e{Avoid using this macro if at all possible. It is tremendously easy
3913 to generate very strange errors by misusing it, and the semantics may
3914 change in future versions of NASM.}
3917 \S{struc} \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC}: \i{Declaring Structure} Data Types
3919 The core of NASM contains no intrinsic means of defining data
3920 structures; instead, the preprocessor is sufficiently powerful that
3921 data structures can be implemented as a set of macros. The macros
3922 \c{STRUC} and \c{ENDSTRUC} are used to define a structure data type.
3924 \c{STRUC} takes one or two parameters. The first parameter is the name
3925 of the data type. The second, optional parameter is the base offset of
3926 the structure. The name of the data type is defined as a symbol with
3927 the value of the base offset, and the name of the data type with the
3928 suffix \c{_size} appended to it is defined as an \c{EQU} giving the
3929 size of the structure. Once \c{STRUC} has been issued, you are
3930 defining the structure, and should define fields using the \c{RESB}
3931 family of pseudo-instructions, and then invoke \c{ENDSTRUC} to finish
3934 For example, to define a structure called \c{mytype} containing a
3935 longword, a word, a byte and a string of bytes, you might code
3946 The above code defines six symbols: \c{mt_long} as 0 (the offset
3947 from the beginning of a \c{mytype} structure to the longword field),
3948 \c{mt_word} as 4, \c{mt_byte} as 6, \c{mt_str} as 7, \c{mytype_size}
3949 as 39, and \c{mytype} itself as zero.
3951 The reason why the structure type name is defined at zero by default
3952 is a side effect of allowing structures to work with the local label
3953 mechanism: if your structure members tend to have the same names in
3954 more than one structure, you can define the above structure like this:
3965 This defines the offsets to the structure fields as \c{mytype.long},
3966 \c{mytype.word}, \c{mytype.byte} and \c{mytype.str}.
3968 NASM, since it has no \e{intrinsic} structure support, does not
3969 support any form of period notation to refer to the elements of a
3970 structure once you have one (except the above local-label notation),
3971 so code such as \c{mov ax,[mystruc.mt_word]} is not valid.
3972 \c{mt_word} is a constant just like any other constant, so the
3973 correct syntax is \c{mov ax,[mystruc+mt_word]} or \c{mov
3974 ax,[mystruc+mytype.word]}.
3976 Sometimes you only have the address of the structure displaced by an
3977 offset. For example, consider this standard stack frame setup:
3983 In this case, you could access an element by subtracting the offset:
3985 \c mov [ebp - 40 + mytype.word], ax
3987 However, if you do not want to repeat this offset, you can use -40 as
3990 \c struc mytype, -40
3992 And access an element this way:
3994 \c mov [ebp + mytype.word], ax
3997 \S{istruc} \i\c{ISTRUC}, \i\c{AT} and \i\c{IEND}: Declaring
3998 \i{Instances of Structures}
4000 Having defined a structure type, the next thing you typically want
4001 to do is to declare instances of that structure in your data
4002 segment. NASM provides an easy way to do this in the \c{ISTRUC}
4003 mechanism. To declare a structure of type \c{mytype} in a program,
4004 you code something like this:
4009 \c at mt_long, dd 123456
4010 \c at mt_word, dw 1024
4011 \c at mt_byte, db 'x'
4012 \c at mt_str, db 'hello, world', 13, 10, 0
4016 The function of the \c{AT} macro is to make use of the \c{TIMES}
4017 prefix to advance the assembly position to the correct point for the
4018 specified structure field, and then to declare the specified data.
4019 Therefore the structure fields must be declared in the same order as
4020 they were specified in the structure definition.
4022 If the data to go in a structure field requires more than one source
4023 line to specify, the remaining source lines can easily come after
4024 the \c{AT} line. For example:
4026 \c at mt_str, db 123,134,145,156,167,178,189
4029 Depending on personal taste, you can also omit the code part of the
4030 \c{AT} line completely, and start the structure field on the next
4034 \c db 'hello, world'
4038 \S{align} \i\c{ALIGN} and \i\c{ALIGNB}: Data Alignment
4040 The \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros provides a convenient way to
4041 align code or data on a word, longword, paragraph or other boundary.
4042 (Some assemblers call this directive \i\c{EVEN}.) The syntax of the
4043 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros is
4045 \c align 4 ; align on 4-byte boundary
4046 \c align 16 ; align on 16-byte boundary
4047 \c align 8,db 0 ; pad with 0s rather than NOPs
4048 \c align 4,resb 1 ; align to 4 in the BSS
4049 \c alignb 4 ; equivalent to previous line
4051 Both macros require their first argument to be a power of two; they
4052 both compute the number of additional bytes required to bring the
4053 length of the current section up to a multiple of that power of two,
4054 and then apply the \c{TIMES} prefix to their second argument to
4055 perform the alignment.
4057 If the second argument is not specified, the default for \c{ALIGN}
4058 is \c{NOP}, and the default for \c{ALIGNB} is \c{RESB 1}. So if the
4059 second argument is specified, the two macros are equivalent.
4060 Normally, you can just use \c{ALIGN} in code and data sections and
4061 \c{ALIGNB} in BSS sections, and never need the second argument
4062 except for special purposes.
4064 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB}, being simple macros, perform no error
4065 checking: they cannot warn you if their first argument fails to be a
4066 power of two, or if their second argument generates more than one
4067 byte of code. In each of these cases they will silently do the wrong
4070 \c{ALIGNB} (or \c{ALIGN} with a second argument of \c{RESB 1}) can
4071 be used within structure definitions:
4088 This will ensure that the structure members are sensibly aligned
4089 relative to the base of the structure.
4091 A final caveat: \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} work relative to the
4092 beginning of the \e{section}, not the beginning of the address space
4093 in the final executable. Aligning to a 16-byte boundary when the
4094 section you're in is only guaranteed to be aligned to a 4-byte
4095 boundary, for example, is a waste of effort. Again, NASM does not
4096 check that the section's alignment characteristics are sensible for
4097 the use of \c{ALIGN} or \c{ALIGNB}.
4099 See also the \c{smartalign} standard macro package, \k{pkg_smartalign}.
4102 \S{sectalign} \i\c{SECTALIGN}: Section Alignment
4104 The \c{SECTALIGN} macros provides a way to modify alignment attribute
4105 of output file section. Unlike the \c{align=} attribute allowed at section
4106 definition only the \c{SECTALIGN} macro may be used any time you need it.
4108 For example the statement
4114 sets a section alignment requirement to 16 bytes. Note that once increased
4115 the section alignment can not be decreased, the magnitude can grow only.
4117 It must be also noted that \c{SECTALIGN} gets called implicitly inside \c{ALIGN}
4118 handler and as result \c{ALIGN} may update section alignment.
4121 \C{macropkg} \i{Standard Macro Packages}
4123 The \i\c{%use} directive (see \k{use}) includes one of the standard
4124 macro packages included with the NASM distribution and compiled into
4125 the NASM binary. It operates like the \c{%include} directive (see
4126 \k{include}), but the included contents is provided by NASM itself.
4128 The names of standard macro packages are case insensitive, and can be
4132 \H{pkg_altreg} \i\c{altreg}: \i{Alternate Register Names}
4134 The \c{altreg} standard macro package provides alternate register
4135 names. It provides numeric register names for all registers (not just
4136 \c{R8}-\c{R15}), the Intel-defined aliases \c{R8L}-\c{R15L} for the
4137 low bytes of register (as opposed to the NASM/AMD standard names
4138 \c{R8B}-\c{R15B}), and the names \c{R0H}-\c{R3H} (by analogy with
4139 \c{R0L}-\c{R3L}) for \c{AH}, \c{CH}, \c{DH}, and \c{BH}.
4146 \c mov r0l,r3h ; mov al,bh
4152 \H{pkg_smartalign} \i\c{smartalign}\I{align, smart}: Smart \c{ALIGN} Macro
4154 The \c{smartalign} standard macro package provides for an \i\c{ALIGN}
4155 macro which is more powerful than the default (and
4156 backwards-compatible) one (see \k{align}). When the \c{smartalign}
4157 package is enabled, when \c{ALIGN} is used without a second argument,
4158 NASM will generate a sequence of instructions more efficient than a
4159 series of \c{NOP}. Furthermore, if the padding exceeds a specific
4160 threshold, then NASM will generate a jump over the entire padding
4163 The specific instructions generated can be controlled with the
4164 new \i\c{ALIGNMODE} macro. This macro takes two parameters: one mode,
4165 and an optional jump threshold override. If (for any reason) you need
4166 to turn off the jump completely just set jump threshold value to -1
4167 (or set it to \c{nojmp}). The following modes are possible:
4169 \b \c{generic}: Works on all x86 CPUs and should have reasonable
4170 performance. The default jump threshold is 8. This is the
4173 \b \c{nop}: Pad out with \c{NOP} instructions. The only difference
4174 compared to the standard \c{ALIGN} macro is that NASM can still jump
4175 over a large padding area. The default jump threshold is 16.
4177 \b \c{k7}: Optimize for the AMD K7 (Athlon/Althon XP). These
4178 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
4181 \b \c{k8}: Optimize for the AMD K8 (Opteron/Althon 64). These
4182 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
4185 \b \c{p6}: Optimize for Intel CPUs. This uses the long \c{NOP}
4186 instructions first introduced in Pentium Pro. This is incompatible
4187 with all CPUs of family 5 or lower, as well as some VIA CPUs and
4188 several virtualization solutions. The default jump threshold is 16.
4190 The macro \i\c{__ALIGNMODE__} is defined to contain the current
4191 alignment mode. A number of other macros beginning with \c{__ALIGN_}
4192 are used internally by this macro package.
4195 \C{directive} \i{Assembler Directives}
4197 NASM, though it attempts to avoid the bureaucracy of assemblers like
4198 MASM and TASM, is nevertheless forced to support a \e{few}
4199 directives. These are described in this chapter.
4201 NASM's directives come in two types: \I{user-level
4202 directives}\e{user-level} directives and \I{primitive
4203 directives}\e{primitive} directives. Typically, each directive has a
4204 user-level form and a primitive form. In almost all cases, we
4205 recommend that users use the user-level forms of the directives,
4206 which are implemented as macros which call the primitive forms.
4208 Primitive directives are enclosed in square brackets; user-level
4211 In addition to the universal directives described in this chapter,
4212 each object file format can optionally supply extra directives in
4213 order to control particular features of that file format. These
4214 \I{format-specific directives}\e{format-specific} directives are
4215 documented along with the formats that implement them, in \k{outfmt}.
4218 \H{bits} \i\c{BITS}: Specifying Target \i{Processor Mode}
4220 The \c{BITS} directive specifies whether NASM should generate code
4221 \I{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}designed to run on a processor
4222 operating in 16-bit mode, 32-bit mode or 64-bit mode. The syntax is
4223 \c{BITS XX}, where XX is 16, 32 or 64.
4225 In most cases, you should not need to use \c{BITS} explicitly. The
4226 \c{aout}, \c{coff}, \c{elf}, \c{macho}, \c{win32} and \c{win64}
4227 object formats, which are designed for use in 32-bit or 64-bit
4228 operating systems, all cause NASM to select 32-bit or 64-bit mode,
4229 respectively, by default. The \c{obj} object format allows you
4230 to specify each segment you define as either \c{USE16} or \c{USE32},
4231 and NASM will set its operating mode accordingly, so the use of the
4232 \c{BITS} directive is once again unnecessary.
4234 The most likely reason for using the \c{BITS} directive is to write
4235 32-bit or 64-bit code in a flat binary file; this is because the \c{bin}
4236 output format defaults to 16-bit mode in anticipation of it being
4237 used most frequently to write DOS \c{.COM} programs, DOS \c{.SYS}
4238 device drivers and boot loader software.
4240 You do \e{not} need to specify \c{BITS 32} merely in order to use
4241 32-bit instructions in a 16-bit DOS program; if you do, the
4242 assembler will generate incorrect code because it will be writing
4243 code targeted at a 32-bit platform, to be run on a 16-bit one.
4245 When NASM is in \c{BITS 16} mode, instructions which use 32-bit
4246 data are prefixed with an 0x66 byte, and those referring to 32-bit
4247 addresses have an 0x67 prefix. In \c{BITS 32} mode, the reverse is
4248 true: 32-bit instructions require no prefixes, whereas instructions
4249 using 16-bit data need an 0x66 and those working on 16-bit addresses
4252 When NASM is in \c{BITS 64} mode, most instructions operate the same
4253 as they do for \c{BITS 32} mode. However, there are 8 more general and
4254 SSE registers, and 16-bit addressing is no longer supported.
4256 The default address size is 64 bits; 32-bit addressing can be selected
4257 with the 0x67 prefix. The default operand size is still 32 bits,
4258 however, and the 0x66 prefix selects 16-bit operand size. The \c{REX}
4259 prefix is used both to select 64-bit operand size, and to access the
4260 new registers. NASM automatically inserts REX prefixes when
4263 When the \c{REX} prefix is used, the processor does not know how to
4264 address the AH, BH, CH or DH (high 8-bit legacy) registers. Instead,
4265 it is possible to access the the low 8-bits of the SP, BP SI and DI
4266 registers as SPL, BPL, SIL and DIL, respectively; but only when the
4269 The \c{BITS} directive has an exactly equivalent primitive form,
4270 \c{[BITS 16]}, \c{[BITS 32]} and \c{[BITS 64]}. The user-level form is
4271 a macro which has no function other than to call the primitive form.
4273 Note that the space is neccessary, e.g. \c{BITS32} will \e{not} work!
4275 \S{USE16 & USE32} \i\c{USE16} & \i\c{USE32}: Aliases for BITS
4277 The `\c{USE16}' and `\c{USE32}' directives can be used in place of
4278 `\c{BITS 16}' and `\c{BITS 32}', for compatibility with other assemblers.
4281 \H{default} \i\c{DEFAULT}: Change the assembler defaults
4283 The \c{DEFAULT} directive changes the assembler defaults. Normally,
4284 NASM defaults to a mode where the programmer is expected to explicitly
4285 specify most features directly. However, this is occationally
4286 obnoxious, as the explicit form is pretty much the only one one wishes
4289 Currently, the only \c{DEFAULT} that is settable is whether or not
4290 registerless instructions in 64-bit mode are \c{RIP}-relative or not.
4291 By default, they are absolute unless overridden with the \i\c{REL}
4292 specifier (see \k{effaddr}). However, if \c{DEFAULT REL} is
4293 specified, \c{REL} is default, unless overridden with the \c{ABS}
4294 specifier, \e{except when used with an FS or GS segment override}.
4296 The special handling of \c{FS} and \c{GS} overrides are due to the
4297 fact that these registers are generally used as thread pointers or
4298 other special functions in 64-bit mode, and generating
4299 \c{RIP}-relative addresses would be extremely confusing.
4301 \c{DEFAULT REL} is disabled with \c{DEFAULT ABS}.
4303 \H{section} \i\c{SECTION} or \i\c{SEGMENT}: Changing and \i{Defining
4306 \I{changing sections}\I{switching between sections}The \c{SECTION}
4307 directive (\c{SEGMENT} is an exactly equivalent synonym) changes
4308 which section of the output file the code you write will be
4309 assembled into. In some object file formats, the number and names of
4310 sections are fixed; in others, the user may make up as many as they
4311 wish. Hence \c{SECTION} may sometimes give an error message, or may
4312 define a new section, if you try to switch to a section that does
4315 The Unix object formats, and the \c{bin} object format (but see
4316 \k{multisec}, all support
4317 the \i{standardized section names} \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}
4318 for the code, data and uninitialized-data sections. The \c{obj}
4319 format, by contrast, does not recognize these section names as being
4320 special, and indeed will strip off the leading period of any section
4324 \S{sectmac} The \i\c{__SECT__} Macro
4326 The \c{SECTION} directive is unusual in that its user-level form
4327 functions differently from its primitive form. The primitive form,
4328 \c{[SECTION xyz]}, simply switches the current target section to the
4329 one given. The user-level form, \c{SECTION xyz}, however, first
4330 defines the single-line macro \c{__SECT__} to be the primitive
4331 \c{[SECTION]} directive which it is about to issue, and then issues
4332 it. So the user-level directive
4336 expands to the two lines
4338 \c %define __SECT__ [SECTION .text]
4341 Users may find it useful to make use of this in their own macros.
4342 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
4343 usefully rewritten in the following more sophisticated form:
4345 \c %macro writefile 2+
4355 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
4362 This form of the macro, once passed a string to output, first
4363 switches temporarily to the data section of the file, using the
4364 primitive form of the \c{SECTION} directive so as not to modify
4365 \c{__SECT__}. It then declares its string in the data section, and
4366 then invokes \c{__SECT__} to switch back to \e{whichever} section
4367 the user was previously working in. It thus avoids the need, in the
4368 previous version of the macro, to include a \c{JMP} instruction to
4369 jump over the data, and also does not fail if, in a complicated
4370 \c{OBJ} format module, the user could potentially be assembling the
4371 code in any of several separate code sections.
4374 \H{absolute} \i\c{ABSOLUTE}: Defining Absolute Labels
4376 The \c{ABSOLUTE} directive can be thought of as an alternative form
4377 of \c{SECTION}: it causes the subsequent code to be directed at no
4378 physical section, but at the hypothetical section starting at the
4379 given absolute address. The only instructions you can use in this
4380 mode are the \c{RESB} family.
4382 \c{ABSOLUTE} is used as follows:
4390 This example describes a section of the PC BIOS data area, at
4391 segment address 0x40: the above code defines \c{kbuf_chr} to be
4392 0x1A, \c{kbuf_free} to be 0x1C, and \c{kbuf} to be 0x1E.
4394 The user-level form of \c{ABSOLUTE}, like that of \c{SECTION},
4395 redefines the \i\c{__SECT__} macro when it is invoked.
4397 \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC} are defined as macros which use
4398 \c{ABSOLUTE} (and also \c{__SECT__}).
4400 \c{ABSOLUTE} doesn't have to take an absolute constant as an
4401 argument: it can take an expression (actually, a \i{critical
4402 expression}: see \k{crit}) and it can be a value in a segment. For
4403 example, a TSR can re-use its setup code as run-time BSS like this:
4405 \c org 100h ; it's a .COM program
4407 \c jmp setup ; setup code comes last
4409 \c ; the resident part of the TSR goes here
4411 \c ; now write the code that installs the TSR here
4415 \c runtimevar1 resw 1
4416 \c runtimevar2 resd 20
4420 This defines some variables `on top of' the setup code, so that
4421 after the setup has finished running, the space it took up can be
4422 re-used as data storage for the running TSR. The symbol `tsr_end'
4423 can be used to calculate the total size of the part of the TSR that
4424 needs to be made resident.
4427 \H{extern} \i\c{EXTERN}: \i{Importing Symbols} from Other Modules
4429 \c{EXTERN} is similar to the MASM directive \c{EXTRN} and the C
4430 keyword \c{extern}: it is used to declare a symbol which is not
4431 defined anywhere in the module being assembled, but is assumed to be
4432 defined in some other module and needs to be referred to by this
4433 one. Not every object-file format can support external variables:
4434 the \c{bin} format cannot.
4436 The \c{EXTERN} directive takes as many arguments as you like. Each
4437 argument is the name of a symbol:
4440 \c extern _sscanf,_fscanf
4442 Some object-file formats provide extra features to the \c{EXTERN}
4443 directive. In all cases, the extra features are used by suffixing a
4444 colon to the symbol name followed by object-format specific text.
4445 For example, the \c{obj} format allows you to declare that the
4446 default segment base of an external should be the group \c{dgroup}
4447 by means of the directive
4449 \c extern _variable:wrt dgroup
4451 The primitive form of \c{EXTERN} differs from the user-level form
4452 only in that it can take only one argument at a time: the support
4453 for multiple arguments is implemented at the preprocessor level.
4455 You can declare the same variable as \c{EXTERN} more than once: NASM
4456 will quietly ignore the second and later redeclarations. You can't
4457 declare a variable as \c{EXTERN} as well as something else, though.
4460 \H{global} \i\c{GLOBAL}: \i{Exporting Symbols} to Other Modules
4462 \c{GLOBAL} is the other end of \c{EXTERN}: if one module declares a
4463 symbol as \c{EXTERN} and refers to it, then in order to prevent
4464 linker errors, some other module must actually \e{define} the
4465 symbol and declare it as \c{GLOBAL}. Some assemblers use the name
4466 \i\c{PUBLIC} for this purpose.
4468 The \c{GLOBAL} directive applying to a symbol must appear \e{before}
4469 the definition of the symbol.
4471 \c{GLOBAL} uses the same syntax as \c{EXTERN}, except that it must
4472 refer to symbols which \e{are} defined in the same module as the
4473 \c{GLOBAL} directive. For example:
4479 \c{GLOBAL}, like \c{EXTERN}, allows object formats to define private
4480 extensions by means of a colon. The \c{elf} object format, for
4481 example, lets you specify whether global data items are functions or
4484 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
4486 Like \c{EXTERN}, the primitive form of \c{GLOBAL} differs from the
4487 user-level form only in that it can take only one argument at a
4491 \H{common} \i\c{COMMON}: Defining Common Data Areas
4493 The \c{COMMON} directive is used to declare \i\e{common variables}.
4494 A common variable is much like a global variable declared in the
4495 uninitialized data section, so that
4499 is similar in function to
4506 The difference is that if more than one module defines the same
4507 common variable, then at link time those variables will be
4508 \e{merged}, and references to \c{intvar} in all modules will point
4509 at the same piece of memory.
4511 Like \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN}, \c{COMMON} supports object-format
4512 specific extensions. For example, the \c{obj} format allows common
4513 variables to be NEAR or FAR, and the \c{elf} format allows you to
4514 specify the alignment requirements of a common variable:
4516 \c common commvar 4:near ; works in OBJ
4517 \c common intarray 100:4 ; works in ELF: 4 byte aligned
4519 Once again, like \c{EXTERN} and \c{GLOBAL}, the primitive form of
4520 \c{COMMON} differs from the user-level form only in that it can take
4521 only one argument at a time.
4524 \H{CPU} \i\c{CPU}: Defining CPU Dependencies
4526 The \i\c{CPU} directive restricts assembly to those instructions which
4527 are available on the specified CPU.
4531 \b\c{CPU 8086} Assemble only 8086 instruction set
4533 \b\c{CPU 186} Assemble instructions up to the 80186 instruction set
4535 \b\c{CPU 286} Assemble instructions up to the 286 instruction set
4537 \b\c{CPU 386} Assemble instructions up to the 386 instruction set
4539 \b\c{CPU 486} 486 instruction set
4541 \b\c{CPU 586} Pentium instruction set
4543 \b\c{CPU PENTIUM} Same as 586
4545 \b\c{CPU 686} P6 instruction set
4547 \b\c{CPU PPRO} Same as 686
4549 \b\c{CPU P2} Same as 686
4551 \b\c{CPU P3} Pentium III (Katmai) instruction sets
4553 \b\c{CPU KATMAI} Same as P3
4555 \b\c{CPU P4} Pentium 4 (Willamette) instruction set
4557 \b\c{CPU WILLAMETTE} Same as P4
4559 \b\c{CPU PRESCOTT} Prescott instruction set
4561 \b\c{CPU X64} x86-64 (x64/AMD64/Intel 64) instruction set
4563 \b\c{CPU IA64} IA64 CPU (in x86 mode) instruction set
4565 All options are case insensitive. All instructions will be selected
4566 only if they apply to the selected CPU or lower. By default, all
4567 instructions are available.
4570 \H{FLOAT} \i\c{FLOAT}: Handling of \I{floating-point, constants}floating-point constants
4572 By default, floating-point constants are rounded to nearest, and IEEE
4573 denormals are supported. The following options can be set to alter
4576 \b\c{FLOAT DAZ} Flush denormals to zero
4578 \b\c{FLOAT NODAZ} Do not flush denormals to zero (default)
4580 \b\c{FLOAT NEAR} Round to nearest (default)
4582 \b\c{FLOAT UP} Round up (toward +Infinity)
4584 \b\c{FLOAT DOWN} Round down (toward -Infinity)
4586 \b\c{FLOAT ZERO} Round toward zero
4588 \b\c{FLOAT DEFAULT} Restore default settings
4590 The standard macros \i\c{__FLOAT_DAZ__}, \i\c{__FLOAT_ROUND__}, and
4591 \i\c{__FLOAT__} contain the current state, as long as the programmer
4592 has avoided the use of the brackeded primitive form, (\c{[FLOAT]}).
4594 \c{__FLOAT__} contains the full set of floating-point settings; this
4595 value can be saved away and invoked later to restore the setting.
4598 \C{outfmt} \i{Output Formats}
4600 NASM is a portable assembler, designed to be able to compile on any
4601 ANSI C-supporting platform and produce output to run on a variety of
4602 Intel x86 operating systems. For this reason, it has a large number
4603 of available output formats, selected using the \i\c{-f} option on
4604 the NASM \i{command line}. Each of these formats, along with its
4605 extensions to the base NASM syntax, is detailed in this chapter.
4607 As stated in \k{opt-o}, NASM chooses a \i{default name} for your
4608 output file based on the input file name and the chosen output
4609 format. This will be generated by removing the \i{extension}
4610 (\c{.asm}, \c{.s}, or whatever you like to use) from the input file
4611 name, and substituting an extension defined by the output format.
4612 The extensions are given with each format below.
4615 \H{binfmt} \i\c{bin}: \i{Flat-Form Binary}\I{pure binary} Output
4617 The \c{bin} format does not produce object files: it generates
4618 nothing in the output file except the code you wrote. Such `pure
4619 binary' files are used by \i{MS-DOS}: \i\c{.COM} executables and
4620 \i\c{.SYS} device drivers are pure binary files. Pure binary output
4621 is also useful for \i{operating system} and \i{boot loader}
4624 The \c{bin} format supports \i{multiple section names}. For details of
4625 how NASM handles sections in the \c{bin} format, see \k{multisec}.
4627 Using the \c{bin} format puts NASM by default into 16-bit mode (see
4628 \k{bits}). In order to use \c{bin} to write 32-bit or 64-bit code,
4629 such as an OS kernel, you need to explicitly issue the \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 32}
4630 or \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 64} directive.
4632 \c{bin} has no default output file name extension: instead, it
4633 leaves your file name as it is once the original extension has been
4634 removed. Thus, the default is for NASM to assemble \c{binprog.asm}
4635 into a binary file called \c{binprog}.
4638 \S{org} \i\c{ORG}: Binary File \i{Program Origin}
4640 The \c{bin} format provides an additional directive to the list
4641 given in \k{directive}: \c{ORG}. The function of the \c{ORG}
4642 directive is to specify the origin address which NASM will assume
4643 the program begins at when it is loaded into memory.
4645 For example, the following code will generate the longword
4652 Unlike the \c{ORG} directive provided by MASM-compatible assemblers,
4653 which allows you to jump around in the object file and overwrite
4654 code you have already generated, NASM's \c{ORG} does exactly what
4655 the directive says: \e{origin}. Its sole function is to specify one
4656 offset which is added to all internal address references within the
4657 section; it does not permit any of the trickery that MASM's version
4658 does. See \k{proborg} for further comments.
4661 \S{binseg} \c{bin} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
4662 Directive\I{SECTION, bin extensions to}
4664 The \c{bin} output format extends the \c{SECTION} (or \c{SEGMENT})
4665 directive to allow you to specify the alignment requirements of
4666 segments. This is done by appending the \i\c{ALIGN} qualifier to the
4667 end of the section-definition line. For example,
4669 \c section .data align=16
4671 switches to the section \c{.data} and also specifies that it must be
4672 aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4674 The parameter to \c{ALIGN} specifies how many low bits of the
4675 section start address must be forced to zero. The alignment value
4676 given may be any power of two.\I{section alignment, in
4677 bin}\I{segment alignment, in bin}\I{alignment, in bin sections}
4680 \S{multisec} \i{Multisection}\I{bin, multisection} Support for the \c{bin} Format
4682 The \c{bin} format allows the use of multiple sections, of arbitrary names,
4683 besides the "known" \c{.text}, \c{.data}, and \c{.bss} names.
4685 \b Sections may be designated \i\c{progbits} or \i\c{nobits}. Default
4686 is \c{progbits} (except \c{.bss}, which defaults to \c{nobits},
4689 \b Sections can be aligned at a specified boundary following the previous
4690 section with \c{align=}, or at an arbitrary byte-granular position with
4693 \b Sections can be given a virtual start address, which will be used
4694 for the calculation of all memory references within that section
4697 \b Sections can be ordered using \i\c{follows=}\c{<section>} or
4698 \i\c{vfollows=}\c{<section>} as an alternative to specifying an explicit
4701 \b Arguments to \c{org}, \c{start}, \c{vstart}, and \c{align=} are
4702 critical expressions. See \k{crit}. E.g. \c{align=(1 << ALIGN_SHIFT)}
4703 - \c{ALIGN_SHIFT} must be defined before it is used here.
4705 \b Any code which comes before an explicit \c{SECTION} directive
4706 is directed by default into the \c{.text} section.
4708 \b If an \c{ORG} statement is not given, \c{ORG 0} is used
4711 \b The \c{.bss} section will be placed after the last \c{progbits}
4712 section, unless \c{start=}, \c{vstart=}, \c{follows=}, or \c{vfollows=}
4715 \b All sections are aligned on dword boundaries, unless a different
4716 alignment has been specified.
4718 \b Sections may not overlap.
4720 \b NASM creates the \c{section.<secname>.start} for each section,
4721 which may be used in your code.
4723 \S{map}\i{Map Files}
4725 Map files can be generated in \c{-f bin} format by means of the \c{[map]}
4726 option. Map types of \c{all} (default), \c{brief}, \c{sections}, \c{segments},
4727 or \c{symbols} may be specified. Output may be directed to \c{stdout}
4728 (default), \c{stderr}, or a specified file. E.g.
4729 \c{[map symbols myfile.map]}. No "user form" exists, the square
4730 brackets must be used.
4733 \H{ithfmt} \i\c{ith}: \i{Intel Hex} Output
4735 The \c{ith} file format produces Intel hex-format files. Just as the
4736 \c{bin} format, this is a flat memory image format with no support for
4737 relocation or linking. It is usually used with ROM programmers and
4740 All extensions supported by the \c{bin} file format is also supported by
4741 the \c{ith} file format.
4743 \c{ith} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.ith}.
4746 \H{srecfmt} \i\c{srec}: \i{Motorola S-Records} Output
4748 The \c{srec} file format produces Motorola S-records files. Just as the
4749 \c{bin} format, this is a flat memory image format with no support for
4750 relocation or linking. It is usually used with ROM programmers and
4753 All extensions supported by the \c{bin} file format is also supported by
4754 the \c{srec} file format.
4756 \c{srec} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.srec}.
4759 \H{objfmt} \i\c{obj}: \i{Microsoft OMF}\I{OMF} Object Files
4761 The \c{obj} file format (NASM calls it \c{obj} rather than \c{omf}
4762 for historical reasons) is the one produced by \i{MASM} and
4763 \i{TASM}, which is typically fed to 16-bit DOS linkers to produce
4764 \i\c{.EXE} files. It is also the format used by \i{OS/2}.
4766 \c{obj} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
4768 \c{obj} is not exclusively a 16-bit format, though: NASM has full
4769 support for the 32-bit extensions to the format. In particular,
4770 32-bit \c{obj} format files are used by \i{Borland's Win32
4771 compilers}, instead of using Microsoft's newer \i\c{win32} object
4774 The \c{obj} format does not define any special segment names: you
4775 can call your segments anything you like. Typical names for segments
4776 in \c{obj} format files are \c{CODE}, \c{DATA} and \c{BSS}.
4778 If your source file contains code before specifying an explicit
4779 \c{SEGMENT} directive, then NASM will invent its own segment called
4780 \i\c{__NASMDEFSEG} for you.
4782 When you define a segment in an \c{obj} file, NASM defines the
4783 segment name as a symbol as well, so that you can access the segment
4784 address of the segment. So, for example:
4793 \c mov ax,data ; get segment address of data
4794 \c mov ds,ax ; and move it into DS
4795 \c inc word [dvar] ; now this reference will work
4798 The \c{obj} format also enables the use of the \i\c{SEG} and
4799 \i\c{WRT} operators, so that you can write code which does things
4804 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment of foo
4806 \c mov ax,data ; a different segment
4808 \c mov ax,[ds:foo] ; this accesses `foo'
4809 \c mov [es:foo wrt data],bx ; so does this
4812 \S{objseg} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{SEGMENT}
4813 Directive\I{SEGMENT, obj extensions to}
4815 The \c{obj} output format extends the \c{SEGMENT} (or \c{SECTION})
4816 directive to allow you to specify various properties of the segment
4817 you are defining. This is done by appending extra qualifiers to the
4818 end of the segment-definition line. For example,
4820 \c segment code private align=16
4822 defines the segment \c{code}, but also declares it to be a private
4823 segment, and requires that the portion of it described in this code
4824 module must be aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4826 The available qualifiers are:
4828 \b \i\c{PRIVATE}, \i\c{PUBLIC}, \i\c{COMMON} and \i\c{STACK} specify
4829 the combination characteristics of the segment. \c{PRIVATE} segments
4830 do not get combined with any others by the linker; \c{PUBLIC} and
4831 \c{STACK} segments get concatenated together at link time; and
4832 \c{COMMON} segments all get overlaid on top of each other rather
4833 than stuck end-to-end.
4835 \b \i\c{ALIGN} is used, as shown above, to specify how many low bits
4836 of the segment start address must be forced to zero. The alignment
4837 value given may be any power of two from 1 to 4096; in reality, the
4838 only values supported are 1, 2, 4, 16, 256 and 4096, so if 8 is
4839 specified it will be rounded up to 16, and 32, 64 and 128 will all
4840 be rounded up to 256, and so on. Note that alignment to 4096-byte
4841 boundaries is a \i{PharLap} extension to the format and may not be
4842 supported by all linkers.\I{section alignment, in OBJ}\I{segment
4843 alignment, in OBJ}\I{alignment, in OBJ sections}
4845 \b \i\c{CLASS} can be used to specify the segment class; this feature
4846 indicates to the linker that segments of the same class should be
4847 placed near each other in the output file. The class name can be any
4848 word, e.g. \c{CLASS=CODE}.
4850 \b \i\c{OVERLAY}, like \c{CLASS}, is specified with an arbitrary word
4851 as an argument, and provides overlay information to an
4852 overlay-capable linker.
4854 \b Segments can be declared as \i\c{USE16} or \i\c{USE32}, which has
4855 the effect of recording the choice in the object file and also
4856 ensuring that NASM's default assembly mode when assembling in that
4857 segment is 16-bit or 32-bit respectively.
4859 \b When writing \i{OS/2} object files, you should declare 32-bit
4860 segments as \i\c{FLAT}, which causes the default segment base for
4861 anything in the segment to be the special group \c{FLAT}, and also
4862 defines the group if it is not already defined.
4864 \b The \c{obj} file format also allows segments to be declared as
4865 having a pre-defined absolute segment address, although no linkers
4866 are currently known to make sensible use of this feature;
4867 nevertheless, NASM allows you to declare a segment such as
4868 \c{SEGMENT SCREEN ABSOLUTE=0xB800} if you need to. The \i\c{ABSOLUTE}
4869 and \c{ALIGN} keywords are mutually exclusive.
4871 NASM's default segment attributes are \c{PUBLIC}, \c{ALIGN=1}, no
4872 class, no overlay, and \c{USE16}.
4875 \S{group} \i\c{GROUP}: Defining Groups of Segments\I{segments, groups of}
4877 The \c{obj} format also allows segments to be grouped, so that a
4878 single segment register can be used to refer to all the segments in
4879 a group. NASM therefore supplies the \c{GROUP} directive, whereby
4888 \c ; some uninitialized data
4890 \c group dgroup data bss
4892 which will define a group called \c{dgroup} to contain the segments
4893 \c{data} and \c{bss}. Like \c{SEGMENT}, \c{GROUP} causes the group
4894 name to be defined as a symbol, so that you can refer to a variable
4895 \c{var} in the \c{data} segment as \c{var wrt data} or as \c{var wrt
4896 dgroup}, depending on which segment value is currently in your
4899 If you just refer to \c{var}, however, and \c{var} is declared in a
4900 segment which is part of a group, then NASM will default to giving
4901 you the offset of \c{var} from the beginning of the \e{group}, not
4902 the \e{segment}. Therefore \c{SEG var}, also, will return the group
4903 base rather than the segment base.
4905 NASM will allow a segment to be part of more than one group, but
4906 will generate a warning if you do this. Variables declared in a
4907 segment which is part of more than one group will default to being
4908 relative to the first group that was defined to contain the segment.
4910 A group does not have to contain any segments; you can still make
4911 \c{WRT} references to a group which does not contain the variable
4912 you are referring to. OS/2, for example, defines the special group
4913 \c{FLAT} with no segments in it.
4916 \S{uppercase} \i\c{UPPERCASE}: Disabling Case Sensitivity in Output
4918 Although NASM itself is \i{case sensitive}, some OMF linkers are
4919 not; therefore it can be useful for NASM to output single-case
4920 object files. The \c{UPPERCASE} format-specific directive causes all
4921 segment, group and symbol names that are written to the object file
4922 to be forced to upper case just before being written. Within a
4923 source file, NASM is still case-sensitive; but the object file can
4924 be written entirely in upper case if desired.
4926 \c{UPPERCASE} is used alone on a line; it requires no parameters.
4929 \S{import} \i\c{IMPORT}: Importing DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
4930 importing}\I{symbols, importing from DLLs}
4932 The \c{IMPORT} format-specific directive defines a symbol to be
4933 imported from a DLL, for use if you are writing a DLL's \i{import
4934 library} in NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{EXTERN}
4935 as well as using the \c{IMPORT} directive.
4937 The \c{IMPORT} directive takes two required parameters, separated by
4938 white space, which are (respectively) the name of the symbol you
4939 wish to import and the name of the library you wish to import it
4942 \c import WSAStartup wsock32.dll
4944 A third optional parameter gives the name by which the symbol is
4945 known in the library you are importing it from, in case this is not
4946 the same as the name you wish the symbol to be known by to your code
4947 once you have imported it. For example:
4949 \c import asyncsel wsock32.dll WSAAsyncSelect
4952 \S{export} \i\c{EXPORT}: Exporting DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
4953 exporting}\I{symbols, exporting from DLLs}
4955 The \c{EXPORT} format-specific directive defines a global symbol to
4956 be exported as a DLL symbol, for use if you are writing a DLL in
4957 NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{GLOBAL} as well as
4958 using the \c{EXPORT} directive.
4960 \c{EXPORT} takes one required parameter, which is the name of the
4961 symbol you wish to export, as it was defined in your source file. An
4962 optional second parameter (separated by white space from the first)
4963 gives the \e{external} name of the symbol: the name by which you
4964 wish the symbol to be known to programs using the DLL. If this name
4965 is the same as the internal name, you may leave the second parameter
4968 Further parameters can be given to define attributes of the exported
4969 symbol. These parameters, like the second, are separated by white
4970 space. If further parameters are given, the external name must also
4971 be specified, even if it is the same as the internal name. The
4972 available attributes are:
4974 \b \c{resident} indicates that the exported name is to be kept
4975 resident by the system loader. This is an optimisation for
4976 frequently used symbols imported by name.
4978 \b \c{nodata} indicates that the exported symbol is a function which
4979 does not make use of any initialized data.
4981 \b \c{parm=NNN}, where \c{NNN} is an integer, sets the number of
4982 parameter words for the case in which the symbol is a call gate
4983 between 32-bit and 16-bit segments.
4985 \b An attribute which is just a number indicates that the symbol
4986 should be exported with an identifying number (ordinal), and gives
4992 \c export myfunc TheRealMoreFormalLookingFunctionName
4993 \c export myfunc myfunc 1234 ; export by ordinal
4994 \c export myfunc myfunc resident parm=23 nodata
4997 \S{dotdotstart} \i\c{..start}: Defining the \i{Program Entry
5000 \c{OMF} linkers require exactly one of the object files being linked to
5001 define the program entry point, where execution will begin when the
5002 program is run. If the object file that defines the entry point is
5003 assembled using NASM, you specify the entry point by declaring the
5004 special symbol \c{..start} at the point where you wish execution to
5008 \S{objextern} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN}
5009 Directive\I{EXTERN, obj extensions to}
5011 If you declare an external symbol with the directive
5015 then references such as \c{mov ax,foo} will give you the offset of
5016 \c{foo} from its preferred segment base (as specified in whichever
5017 module \c{foo} is actually defined in). So to access the contents of
5018 \c{foo} you will usually need to do something like
5020 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment base
5021 \c mov es,ax ; move it into ES
5022 \c mov ax,[es:foo] ; and use offset `foo' from it
5024 This is a little unwieldy, particularly if you know that an external
5025 is going to be accessible from a given segment or group, say
5026 \c{dgroup}. So if \c{DS} already contained \c{dgroup}, you could
5029 \c mov ax,[foo wrt dgroup]
5031 However, having to type this every time you want to access \c{foo}
5032 can be a pain; so NASM allows you to declare \c{foo} in the
5035 \c extern foo:wrt dgroup
5037 This form causes NASM to pretend that the preferred segment base of
5038 \c{foo} is in fact \c{dgroup}; so the expression \c{seg foo} will
5039 now return \c{dgroup}, and the expression \c{foo} is equivalent to
5042 This \I{default-WRT mechanism}default-\c{WRT} mechanism can be used
5043 to make externals appear to be relative to any group or segment in
5044 your program. It can also be applied to common variables: see
5048 \S{objcommon} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{COMMON}
5049 Directive\I{COMMON, obj extensions to}
5051 The \c{obj} format allows common variables to be either near\I{near
5052 common variables} or far\I{far common variables}; NASM allows you to
5053 specify which your variables should be by the use of the syntax
5055 \c common nearvar 2:near ; `nearvar' is a near common
5056 \c common farvar 10:far ; and `farvar' is far
5058 Far common variables may be greater in size than 64Kb, and so the
5059 OMF specification says that they are declared as a number of
5060 \e{elements} of a given size. So a 10-byte far common variable could
5061 be declared as ten one-byte elements, five two-byte elements, two
5062 five-byte elements or one ten-byte element.
5064 Some \c{OMF} linkers require the \I{element size, in common
5065 variables}\I{common variables, element size}element size, as well as
5066 the variable size, to match when resolving common variables declared
5067 in more than one module. Therefore NASM must allow you to specify
5068 the element size on your far common variables. This is done by the
5071 \c common c_5by2 10:far 5 ; two five-byte elements
5072 \c common c_2by5 10:far 2 ; five two-byte elements
5074 If no element size is specified, the default is 1. Also, the \c{FAR}
5075 keyword is not required when an element size is specified, since
5076 only far commons may have element sizes at all. So the above
5077 declarations could equivalently be
5079 \c common c_5by2 10:5 ; two five-byte elements
5080 \c common c_2by5 10:2 ; five two-byte elements
5082 In addition to these extensions, the \c{COMMON} directive in \c{obj}
5083 also supports default-\c{WRT} specification like \c{EXTERN} does
5084 (explained in \k{objextern}). So you can also declare things like
5086 \c common foo 10:wrt dgroup
5087 \c common bar 16:far 2:wrt data
5088 \c common baz 24:wrt data:6
5091 \H{win32fmt} \i\c{win32}: Microsoft Win32 Object Files
5093 The \c{win32} output format generates Microsoft Win32 object files,
5094 suitable for passing to Microsoft linkers such as \i{Visual C++}.
5095 Note that Borland Win32 compilers do not use this format, but use
5096 \c{obj} instead (see \k{objfmt}).
5098 \c{win32} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
5100 Note that although Microsoft say that Win32 object files follow the
5101 \c{COFF} (Common Object File Format) standard, the object files produced
5102 by Microsoft Win32 compilers are not compatible with COFF linkers
5103 such as DJGPP's, and vice versa. This is due to a difference of
5104 opinion over the precise semantics of PC-relative relocations. To
5105 produce COFF files suitable for DJGPP, use NASM's \c{coff} output
5106 format; conversely, the \c{coff} format does not produce object
5107 files that Win32 linkers can generate correct output from.
5110 \S{win32sect} \c{win32} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5111 Directive\I{SECTION, win32 extensions to}
5113 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{win32} allows you to specify additional
5114 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
5115 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
5116 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section names}
5117 \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}, but may still be overridden by
5120 The available qualifiers are:
5122 \b \c{code}, or equivalently \c{text}, defines the section to be a
5123 code section. This marks the section as readable and executable, but
5124 not writable, and also indicates to the linker that the type of the
5127 \b \c{data} and \c{bss} define the section to be a data section,
5128 analogously to \c{code}. Data sections are marked as readable and
5129 writable, but not executable. \c{data} declares an initialized data
5130 section, whereas \c{bss} declares an uninitialized data section.
5132 \b \c{rdata} declares an initialized data section that is readable
5133 but not writable. Microsoft compilers use this section to place
5136 \b \c{info} defines the section to be an \i{informational section},
5137 which is not included in the executable file by the linker, but may
5138 (for example) pass information \e{to} the linker. For example,
5139 declaring an \c{info}-type section called \i\c{.drectve} causes the
5140 linker to interpret the contents of the section as command-line
5143 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
5144 \I{section alignment, in win32}\I{alignment, in win32
5145 sections}alignment requirements of the section. The maximum you may
5146 specify is 64: the Win32 object file format contains no means to
5147 request a greater section alignment than this. If alignment is not
5148 explicitly specified, the defaults are 16-byte alignment for code
5149 sections, 8-byte alignment for rdata sections and 4-byte alignment
5150 for data (and BSS) sections.
5151 Informational sections get a default alignment of 1 byte (no
5152 alignment), though the value does not matter.
5154 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
5157 \c section .text code align=16
5158 \c section .data data align=4
5159 \c section .rdata rdata align=8
5160 \c section .bss bss align=4
5162 Any other section name is treated by default like \c{.text}.
5164 \S{win32safeseh} \c{win32}: Safe Structured Exception Handling
5166 Among other improvements in Windows XP SP2 and Windows Server 2003
5167 Microsoft has introduced concept of "safe structured exception
5168 handling." General idea is to collect handlers' entry points in
5169 designated read-only table and have alleged entry point verified
5170 against this table prior exception control is passed to the handler. In
5171 order for an executable module to be equipped with such "safe exception
5172 handler table," all object modules on linker command line has to comply
5173 with certain criteria. If one single module among them does not, then
5174 the table in question is omitted and above mentioned run-time checks
5175 will not be performed for application in question. Table omission is by
5176 default silent and therefore can be easily overlooked. One can instruct
5177 linker to refuse to produce binary without such table by passing
5178 \c{/safeseh} command line option.
5180 Without regard to this run-time check merits it's natural to expect
5181 NASM to be capable of generating modules suitable for \c{/safeseh}
5182 linking. From developer's viewpoint the problem is two-fold:
5184 \b how to adapt modules not deploying exception handlers of their own;
5186 \b how to adapt/develop modules utilizing custom exception handling;
5188 Former can be easily achieved with any NASM version by adding following
5189 line to source code:
5193 As of version 2.03 NASM adds this absolute symbol automatically. If
5194 it's not already present to be precise. I.e. if for whatever reason
5195 developer would choose to assign another value in source file, it would
5196 still be perfectly possible.
5198 Registering custom exception handler on the other hand requires certain
5199 "magic." As of version 2.03 additional directive is implemented,
5200 \c{safeseh}, which instructs the assembler to produce appropriately
5201 formatted input data for above mentioned "safe exception handler
5202 table." Its typical use would be:
5205 \c extern _MessageBoxA@16
5206 \c %if __NASM_VERSION_ID__ >= 0x02030000
5207 \c safeseh handler ; register handler as "safe handler"
5210 \c push DWORD 1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
5211 \c push DWORD caption
5214 \c call _MessageBoxA@16
5215 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
5216 \c ; for exception handler
5220 \c push DWORD handler
5221 \c push DWORD [fs:0]
5222 \c mov DWORD [fs:0],esp ; engage exception handler
5224 \c mov eax,DWORD[eax] ; cause exception
5225 \c pop DWORD [fs:0] ; disengage exception handler
5228 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5229 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5231 \c section .drectve info
5232 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5234 As you might imagine, it's perfectly possible to produce .exe binary
5235 with "safe exception handler table" and yet engage unregistered
5236 exception handler. Indeed, handler is engaged by simply manipulating
5237 \c{[fs:0]} location at run-time, something linker has no power over,
5238 run-time that is. It should be explicitly mentioned that such failure
5239 to register handler's entry point with \c{safeseh} directive has
5240 undesired side effect at run-time. If exception is raised and
5241 unregistered handler is to be executed, the application is abruptly
5242 terminated without any notification whatsoever. One can argue that
5243 system could at least have logged some kind "non-safe exception
5244 handler in x.exe at address n" message in event log, but no, literally
5245 no notification is provided and user is left with no clue on what
5246 caused application failure.
5248 Finally, all mentions of linker in this paragraph refer to Microsoft
5249 linker version 7.x and later. Presence of \c{@feat.00} symbol and input
5250 data for "safe exception handler table" causes no backward
5251 incompatibilities and "safeseh" modules generated by NASM 2.03 and
5252 later can still be linked by earlier versions or non-Microsoft linkers.
5255 \H{win64fmt} \i\c{win64}: Microsoft Win64 Object Files
5257 The \c{win64} output format generates Microsoft Win64 object files,
5258 which is nearly 100% identical to the \c{win32} object format (\k{win32fmt})
5259 with the exception that it is meant to target 64-bit code and the x86-64
5260 platform altogether. This object file is used exactly the same as the \c{win32}
5261 object format (\k{win32fmt}), in NASM, with regard to this exception.
5263 \S{win64pic} \c{win64}: Writing Position-Independent Code
5265 While \c{REL} takes good care of RIP-relative addressing, there is one
5266 aspect that is easy to overlook for a Win64 programmer: indirect
5267 references. Consider a switch dispatch table:
5269 \c jmp QWORD[dsptch+rax*8]
5275 Even novice Win64 assembler programmer will soon realize that the code
5276 is not 64-bit savvy. Most notably linker will refuse to link it with
5277 "\c{'ADDR32' relocation to '.text' invalid without
5278 /LARGEADDRESSAWARE:NO}". So [s]he will have to split jmp instruction as
5281 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5282 \c jmp QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5284 What happens behind the scene is that effective address in \c{lea} is
5285 encoded relative to instruction pointer, or in perfectly
5286 position-independent manner. But this is only part of the problem!
5287 Trouble is that in .dll context \c{caseN} relocations will make their
5288 way to the final module and might have to be adjusted at .dll load
5289 time. To be specific when it can't be loaded at preferred address. And
5290 when this occurs, pages with such relocations will be rendered private
5291 to current process, which kind of undermines the idea of sharing .dll.
5292 But no worry, it's trivial to fix:
5294 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5295 \c add rbx,QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5298 \c dsptch: dq case0-dsptch
5302 NASM version 2.03 and later provides another alternative, \c{wrt
5303 ..imagebase} operator, which returns offset from base address of the
5304 current image, be it .exe or .dll module, therefore the name. For those
5305 acquainted with PE-COFF format base address denotes start of
5306 \c{IMAGE_DOS_HEADER} structure. Here is how to implement switch with
5307 these image-relative references:
5309 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5310 \c mov eax,DWORD[rbx+rax*4]
5311 \c sub rbx,dsptch wrt ..imagebase
5315 \c dsptch: dd case0 wrt ..imagebase
5316 \c dd case1 wrt ..imagebase
5318 One can argue that the operator is redundant. Indeed, snippet before
5319 last works just fine with any NASM version and is not even Windows
5320 specific... The real reason for implementing \c{wrt ..imagebase} will
5321 become apparent in next paragraph.
5323 It should be noted that \c{wrt ..imagebase} is defined as 32-bit
5326 \c dd label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5327 \c dq label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5328 \c mov eax,label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5329 \c mov rax,label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5331 \S{win64seh} \c{win64}: Structured Exception Handling
5333 Structured exception handing in Win64 is completely different matter
5334 from Win32. Upon exception program counter value is noted, and
5335 linker-generated table comprising start and end addresses of all the
5336 functions [in given executable module] is traversed and compared to the
5337 saved program counter. Thus so called \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5338 identified. If it's not found, then offending subroutine is assumed to
5339 be "leaf" and just mentioned lookup procedure is attempted for its
5340 caller. In Win64 leaf function is such function that does not call any
5341 other function \e{nor} modifies any Win64 non-volatile registers,
5342 including stack pointer. The latter ensures that it's possible to
5343 identify leaf function's caller by simply pulling the value from the
5346 While majority of subroutines written in assembler are not calling any
5347 other function, requirement for non-volatile registers' immutability
5348 leaves developer with not more than 7 registers and no stack frame,
5349 which is not necessarily what [s]he counted with. Customarily one would
5350 meet the requirement by saving non-volatile registers on stack and
5351 restoring them upon return, so what can go wrong? If [and only if] an
5352 exception is raised at run-time and no \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5353 associated with such "leaf" function, the stack unwind procedure will
5354 expect to find caller's return address on the top of stack immediately
5355 followed by its frame. Given that developer pushed caller's
5356 non-volatile registers on stack, would the value on top point at some
5357 code segment or even addressable space? Well, developer can attempt
5358 copying caller's return address to the top of stack and this would
5359 actually work in some very specific circumstances. But unless developer
5360 can guarantee that these circumstances are always met, it's more
5361 appropriate to assume worst case scenario, i.e. stack unwind procedure
5362 going berserk. Relevant question is what happens then? Application is
5363 abruptly terminated without any notification whatsoever. Just like in
5364 Win32 case, one can argue that system could at least have logged
5365 "unwind procedure went berserk in x.exe at address n" in event log, but
5366 no, no trace of failure is left.
5368 Now, when we understand significance of the \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure,
5369 let's discuss what's in it and/or how it's processed. First of all it
5370 is checked for presence of reference to custom language-specific
5371 exception handler. If there is one, then it's invoked. Depending on the
5372 return value, execution flow is resumed (exception is said to be
5373 "handled"), \e{or} rest of \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is processed as
5374 following. Beside optional reference to custom handler, it carries
5375 information about current callee's stack frame and where non-volatile
5376 registers are saved. Information is detailed enough to be able to
5377 reconstruct contents of caller's non-volatile registers upon call to
5378 current callee. And so caller's context is reconstructed, and then
5379 unwind procedure is repeated, i.e. another \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5380 associated, this time, with caller's instruction pointer, which is then
5381 checked for presence of reference to language-specific handler, etc.
5382 The procedure is recursively repeated till exception is handled. As
5383 last resort system "handles" it by generating memory core dump and
5384 terminating the application.
5386 As for the moment of this writing NASM unfortunately does not
5387 facilitate generation of above mentioned detailed information about
5388 stack frame layout. But as of version 2.03 it implements building
5389 blocks for generating structures involved in stack unwinding. As
5390 simplest example, here is how to deploy custom exception handler for
5395 \c extern MessageBoxA
5401 \c mov r9,1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
5403 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
5404 \c ; for exception handler
5410 \c mov rax,QWORD[rax] ; cause exception
5413 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5414 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5416 \c section .pdata rdata align=4
5417 \c dd main wrt ..imagebase
5418 \c dd main_end wrt ..imagebase
5419 \c dd xmain wrt ..imagebase
5420 \c section .xdata rdata align=8
5421 \c xmain: db 9,0,0,0
5422 \c dd handler wrt ..imagebase
5423 \c section .drectve info
5424 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5426 What you see in \c{.pdata} section is element of the "table comprising
5427 start and end addresses of function" along with reference to associated
5428 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure. And what you see in \c{.xdata} section is
5429 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure describing function with no frame, but with
5430 designated exception handler. References are \e{required} to be
5431 image-relative (which is the real reason for implementing \c{wrt
5432 ..imagebase} operator). It should be noted that \c{rdata align=n}, as
5433 well as \c{wrt ..imagebase}, are optional in these two segments'
5434 contexts, i.e. can be omitted. Latter means that \e{all} 32-bit
5435 references, not only above listed required ones, placed into these two
5436 segments turn out image-relative. Why is it important to understand?
5437 Developer is allowed to append handler-specific data to \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5438 structure, and if [s]he adds a 32-bit reference, then [s]he will have
5439 to remember to adjust its value to obtain the real pointer.
5441 As already mentioned, in Win64 terms leaf function is one that does not
5442 call any other function \e{nor} modifies any non-volatile register,
5443 including stack pointer. But it's not uncommon that assembler
5444 programmer plans to utilize every single register and sometimes even
5445 have variable stack frame. Is there anything one can do with bare
5446 building blocks? I.e. besides manually composing fully-fledged
5447 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure, which would surely be considered
5448 error-prone? Yes, there is. Recall that exception handler is called
5449 first, before stack layout is analyzed. As it turned out, it's
5450 perfectly possible to manipulate current callee's context in custom
5451 handler in manner that permits further stack unwinding. General idea is
5452 that handler would not actually "handle" the exception, but instead
5453 restore callee's context, as it was at its entry point and thus mimic
5454 leaf function. In other words, handler would simply undertake part of
5455 unwinding procedure. Consider following example:
5458 \c mov rax,rsp ; copy rsp to volatile register
5459 \c push r15 ; save non-volatile registers
5462 \c mov r11,rsp ; prepare variable stack frame
5465 \c mov QWORD[r11],rax ; check for exceptions
5466 \c mov rsp,r11 ; allocate stack frame
5467 \c mov QWORD[rsp],rax ; save original rsp value
5470 \c mov r11,QWORD[rsp] ; pull original rsp value
5471 \c mov rbp,QWORD[r11-24]
5472 \c mov rbx,QWORD[r11-16]
5473 \c mov r15,QWORD[r11-8]
5474 \c mov rsp,r11 ; destroy frame
5477 The keyword is that up to \c{magic_point} original \c{rsp} value
5478 remains in chosen volatile register and no non-volatile register,
5479 except for \c{rsp}, is modified. While past \c{magic_point} \c{rsp}
5480 remains constant till the very end of the \c{function}. In this case
5481 custom language-specific exception handler would look like this:
5483 \c EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION handler (EXCEPTION_RECORD *rec,ULONG64 frame,
5484 \c CONTEXT *context,DISPATCHER_CONTEXT *disp)
5486 \c if (context->Rip<(ULONG64)magic_point)
5487 \c rsp = (ULONG64 *)context->Rax;
5489 \c { rsp = ((ULONG64 **)context->Rsp)[0];
5490 \c context->Rbp = rsp[-3];
5491 \c context->Rbx = rsp[-2];
5492 \c context->R15 = rsp[-1];
5494 \c context->Rsp = (ULONG64)rsp;
5496 \c memcpy (disp->ContextRecord,context,sizeof(CONTEXT));
5497 \c RtlVirtualUnwind(UNW_FLAG_NHANDLER,disp->ImageBase,
5498 \c dips->ControlPc,disp->FunctionEntry,disp->ContextRecord,
5499 \c &disp->HandlerData,&disp->EstablisherFrame,NULL);
5500 \c return ExceptionContinueSearch;
5503 As custom handler mimics leaf function, corresponding \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5504 structure does not have to contain any information about stack frame
5507 \H{cofffmt} \i\c{coff}: \i{Common Object File Format}
5509 The \c{coff} output type produces \c{COFF} object files suitable for
5510 linking with the \i{DJGPP} linker.
5512 \c{coff} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5514 The \c{coff} format supports the same extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5515 directive as \c{win32} does, except that the \c{align} qualifier and
5516 the \c{info} section type are not supported.
5518 \H{machofmt} \I{Mach-O}\i\c{macho32} and \i\c{macho64}: \i{Mach Object File Format}
5520 The \c{macho32} and \c{macho64} output formts produces \c{Mach-O}
5521 object files suitable for linking with the \i{MacOS X} linker.
5522 \i\c{macho} is a synonym for \c{macho32}.
5524 \c{macho} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5526 \H{elffmt} \i\c{elf32} and \i\c{elf64}: \I{ELF}\I{linux, elf}\i{Executable and Linkable
5527 Format} Object Files
5529 The \c{elf32} and \c{elf64} output formats generate \c{ELF32 and ELF64} (Executable and Linkable Format) object files, as used by Linux as well as \i{Unix System V},
5530 including \i{Solaris x86}, \i{UnixWare} and \i{SCO Unix}. \c{elf}
5531 provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5532 \c{elf} is a synonym for \c{elf32}.
5534 \S{abisect} ELF specific directive \i\c{osabi}
5536 The ELF header specifies the application binary interface for the target operating system (OSABI).
5537 This field can be set by using the \c{osabi} directive with the numeric value (0-255) of the target
5538 system. If this directive is not used, the default value will be "UNIX System V ABI" (0) which will work on
5539 most systems which support ELF.
5541 \S{elfsect} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5542 Directive\I{SECTION, elf extensions to}
5544 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{elf} allows you to specify additional
5545 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
5546 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
5547 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section
5548 names}, but may still be
5549 overridden by these qualifiers.
5551 The available qualifiers are:
5553 \b \i\c{alloc} defines the section to be one which is loaded into
5554 memory when the program is run. \i\c{noalloc} defines it to be one
5555 which is not, such as an informational or comment section.
5557 \b \i\c{exec} defines the section to be one which should have execute
5558 permission when the program is run. \i\c{noexec} defines it as one
5561 \b \i\c{write} defines the section to be one which should be writable
5562 when the program is run. \i\c{nowrite} defines it as one which should
5565 \b \i\c{progbits} defines the section to be one with explicit contents
5566 stored in the object file: an ordinary code or data section, for
5567 example, \i\c{nobits} defines the section to be one with no explicit
5568 contents given, such as a BSS section.
5570 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
5571 \I{section alignment, in elf}\I{alignment, in elf sections}alignment
5572 requirements of the section.
5574 \b \i\c{tls} defines the section to be one which contains
5575 thread local variables.
5577 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
5580 \I\c{.text} \I\c{.rodata} \I\c{.lrodata} \I\c{.data} \I\c{.ldata}
5581 \I\c{.bss} \I\c{.lbss} \I\c{.tdata} \I\c{.tbss} \I\c\{.comment}
5583 \c section .text progbits alloc exec nowrite align=16
5584 \c section .rodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5585 \c section .lrodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5586 \c section .data progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5587 \c section .ldata progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5588 \c section .bss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5589 \c section .lbss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5590 \c section .tdata progbits alloc noexec write align=4 tls
5591 \c section .tbss nobits alloc noexec write align=4 tls
5592 \c section .comment progbits noalloc noexec nowrite align=1
5593 \c section other progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=1
5595 (Any section name other than those in the above table
5596 is treated by default like \c{other} in the above table.
5597 Please note that section names are case sensitive.)
5600 \S{elfwrt} \i{Position-Independent Code}\I{PIC}: \c{elf} Special
5601 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5603 The \c{ELF} specification contains enough features to allow
5604 position-independent code (PIC) to be written, which makes \i{ELF
5605 shared libraries} very flexible. However, it also means NASM has to
5606 be able to generate a variety of ELF specific relocation types in ELF
5607 object files, if it is to be an assembler which can write PIC.
5609 Since \c{ELF} does not support segment-base references, the \c{WRT}
5610 operator is not used for its normal purpose; therefore NASM's
5611 \c{elf} output format makes use of \c{WRT} for a different purpose,
5612 namely the PIC-specific \I{relocations, PIC-specific}relocation
5615 \c{elf} defines five special symbols which you can use as the
5616 right-hand side of the \c{WRT} operator to obtain PIC relocation
5617 types. They are \i\c{..gotpc}, \i\c{..gotoff}, \i\c{..got},
5618 \i\c{..plt} and \i\c{..sym}. Their functions are summarized here:
5620 \b Referring to the symbol marking the global offset table base
5621 using \c{wrt ..gotpc} will end up giving the distance from the
5622 beginning of the current section to the global offset table.
5623 (\i\c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_} is the standard symbol name used to
5624 refer to the \i{GOT}.) So you would then need to add \i\c{$$} to the
5625 result to get the real address of the GOT.
5627 \b Referring to a location in one of your own sections using \c{wrt
5628 ..gotoff} will give the distance from the beginning of the GOT to
5629 the specified location, so that adding on the address of the GOT
5630 would give the real address of the location you wanted.
5632 \b Referring to an external or global symbol using \c{wrt ..got}
5633 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5634 address of the symbol, and the reference gives the distance from the
5635 beginning of the GOT to the entry; so you can add on the address of
5636 the GOT, load from the resulting address, and end up with the
5637 address of the symbol.
5639 \b Referring to a procedure name using \c{wrt ..plt} causes the
5640 linker to build a \i{procedure linkage table} entry for the symbol,
5641 and the reference gives the address of the \i{PLT} entry. You can
5642 only use this in contexts which would generate a PC-relative
5643 relocation normally (i.e. as the destination for \c{CALL} or
5644 \c{JMP}), since ELF contains no relocation type to refer to PLT
5647 \b Referring to a symbol name using \c{wrt ..sym} causes NASM to
5648 write an ordinary relocation, but instead of making the relocation
5649 relative to the start of the section and then adding on the offset
5650 to the symbol, it will write a relocation record aimed directly at
5651 the symbol in question. The distinction is a necessary one due to a
5652 peculiarity of the dynamic linker.
5654 A fuller explanation of how to use these relocation types to write
5655 shared libraries entirely in NASM is given in \k{picdll}.
5657 \S{elftls} \i{Thread Local Storage}\I{TLS}: \c{elf} Special
5658 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5660 \b In ELF32 mode, referring to an external or global symbol using
5661 \c{wrt ..tlsie} \I\c{..tlsie}
5662 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5663 offset of the symbol within the TLS block, so you can access the value
5664 of the symbol with code such as:
5666 \c mov eax,[tid wrt ..tlsie]
5670 \b In ELF64 mode, referring to an external or global symbol using
5671 \c{wrt ..gottpoff} \I\c{..gottpoff}
5672 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5673 offset of the symbol within the TLS block, so you can access the value
5674 of the symbol with code such as:
5676 \c mov rax,[rel tid wrt ..gottpoff]
5680 \S{elfglob} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} Directive\I{GLOBAL,
5681 elf extensions to}\I{GLOBAL, aoutb extensions to}
5683 \c{ELF} object files can contain more information about a global symbol
5684 than just its address: they can contain the \I{symbol sizes,
5685 specifying}\I{size, of symbols}size of the symbol and its \I{symbol
5686 types, specifying}\I{type, of symbols}type as well. These are not
5687 merely debugger conveniences, but are actually necessary when the
5688 program being written is a \i{shared library}. NASM therefore
5689 supports some extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} directive, allowing you
5690 to specify these features.
5692 You can specify whether a global variable is a function or a data
5693 object by suffixing the name with a colon and the word
5694 \i\c{function} or \i\c{data}. (\i\c{object} is a synonym for
5695 \c{data}.) For example:
5697 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
5699 exports the global symbol \c{hashlookup} as a function and
5700 \c{hashtable} as a data object.
5702 Optionally, you can control the ELF visibility of the symbol. Just
5703 add one of the visibility keywords: \i\c{default}, \i\c{internal},
5704 \i\c{hidden}, or \i\c{protected}. The default is \i\c{default} of
5705 course. For example, to make \c{hashlookup} hidden:
5707 \c global hashlookup:function hidden
5709 You can also specify the size of the data associated with the
5710 symbol, as a numeric expression (which may involve labels, and even
5711 forward references) after the type specifier. Like this:
5713 \c global hashtable:data (hashtable.end - hashtable)
5716 \c db this,that,theother ; some data here
5719 This makes NASM automatically calculate the length of the table and
5720 place that information into the \c{ELF} symbol table.
5722 Declaring the type and size of global symbols is necessary when
5723 writing shared library code. For more information, see
5727 \S{elfcomm} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{COMMON} Directive
5728 \I{COMMON, elf extensions to}
5730 \c{ELF} also allows you to specify alignment requirements \I{common
5731 variables, alignment in elf}\I{alignment, of elf common variables}on
5732 common variables. This is done by putting a number (which must be a
5733 power of two) after the name and size of the common variable,
5734 separated (as usual) by a colon. For example, an array of
5735 doublewords would benefit from 4-byte alignment:
5737 \c common dwordarray 128:4
5739 This declares the total size of the array to be 128 bytes, and
5740 requires that it be aligned on a 4-byte boundary.
5743 \S{elf16} 16-bit code and ELF
5744 \I{ELF, 16-bit code and}
5746 The \c{ELF32} specification doesn't provide relocations for 8- and
5747 16-bit values, but the GNU \c{ld} linker adds these as an extension.
5748 NASM can generate GNU-compatible relocations, to allow 16-bit code to
5749 be linked as ELF using GNU \c{ld}. If NASM is used with the
5750 \c{-w+gnu-elf-extensions} option, a warning is issued when one of
5751 these relocations is generated.
5753 \S{elfdbg} Debug formats and ELF
5754 \I{ELF, Debug formats and}
5756 \c{ELF32} and \c{ELF64} provide debug information in \c{STABS} and \c{DWARF} formats.
5757 Line number information is generated for all executable sections, but please
5758 note that only the ".text" section is executable by default.
5760 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aout}: Linux \I{a.out, Linux version}\I{linux, a.out}\c{a.out} Object Files
5762 The \c{aout} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form used
5763 by early Linux systems (current Linux systems use ELF, see
5764 \k{elffmt}.) These differ from other \c{a.out} object files in that
5765 the magic number in the first four bytes of the file is
5766 different; also, some implementations of \c{a.out}, for example
5767 NetBSD's, support position-independent code, which Linux's
5768 implementation does not.
5770 \c{a.out} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5772 \c{a.out} is a very simple object format. It supports no special
5773 directives, no special symbols, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT}, and no
5774 extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5775 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5778 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aoutb}: \i{NetBSD}/\i{FreeBSD}/\i{OpenBSD}
5779 \I{a.out, BSD version}\c{a.out} Object Files
5781 The \c{aoutb} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form
5782 used by the various free \c{BSD Unix} clones, \c{NetBSD}, \c{FreeBSD}
5783 and \c{OpenBSD}. For simple object files, this object format is exactly
5784 the same as \c{aout} except for the magic number in the first four bytes
5785 of the file. However, the \c{aoutb} format supports
5786 \I{PIC}\i{position-independent code} in the same way as the \c{elf}
5787 format, so you can use it to write \c{BSD} \i{shared libraries}.
5789 \c{aoutb} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5791 \c{aoutb} supports no special directives, no special symbols, and
5792 only the three \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data}
5793 and \i\c{.bss}. However, it also supports the same use of \i\c{WRT} as
5794 \c{elf} does, to provide position-independent code relocation types.
5795 See \k{elfwrt} for full documentation of this feature.
5797 \c{aoutb} also supports the same extensions to the \c{GLOBAL}
5798 directive as \c{elf} does: see \k{elfglob} for documentation of
5802 \H{as86fmt} \c{as86}: \i{Minix}/Linux\I{linux, as86} \i\c{as86} Object Files
5804 The Minix/Linux 16-bit assembler \c{as86} has its own non-standard
5805 object file format. Although its companion linker \i\c{ld86} produces
5806 something close to ordinary \c{a.out} binaries as output, the object
5807 file format used to communicate between \c{as86} and \c{ld86} is not
5810 NASM supports this format, just in case it is useful, as \c{as86}.
5811 \c{as86} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5813 \c{as86} is a very simple object format (from the NASM user's point
5814 of view). It supports no special directives, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT},
5815 and no extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5816 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}. The
5817 only special symbol supported is \c{..start}.
5820 \H{rdffmt} \I{RDOFF}\i\c{rdf}: \i{Relocatable Dynamic Object File
5823 The \c{rdf} output format produces \c{RDOFF} object files. \c{RDOFF}
5824 (Relocatable Dynamic Object File Format) is a home-grown object-file
5825 format, designed alongside NASM itself and reflecting in its file
5826 format the internal structure of the assembler.
5828 \c{RDOFF} is not used by any well-known operating systems. Those
5829 writing their own systems, however, may well wish to use \c{RDOFF}
5830 as their object format, on the grounds that it is designed primarily
5831 for simplicity and contains very little file-header bureaucracy.
5833 The Unix NASM archive, and the DOS archive which includes sources,
5834 both contain an \I{rdoff subdirectory}\c{rdoff} subdirectory holding
5835 a set of RDOFF utilities: an RDF linker, an \c{RDF} static-library
5836 manager, an RDF file dump utility, and a program which will load and
5837 execute an RDF executable under Linux.
5839 \c{rdf} supports only the \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text},
5840 \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5843 \S{rdflib} Requiring a Library: The \i\c{LIBRARY} Directive
5845 \c{RDOFF} contains a mechanism for an object file to demand a given
5846 library to be linked to the module, either at load time or run time.
5847 This is done by the \c{LIBRARY} directive, which takes one argument
5848 which is the name of the module:
5850 \c library mylib.rdl
5853 \S{rdfmod} Specifying a Module Name: The \i\c{MODULE} Directive
5855 Special \c{RDOFF} header record is used to store the name of the module.
5856 It can be used, for example, by run-time loader to perform dynamic
5857 linking. \c{MODULE} directive takes one argument which is the name
5862 Note that when you statically link modules and tell linker to strip
5863 the symbols from output file, all module names will be stripped too.
5864 To avoid it, you should start module names with \I{$, prefix}\c{$}, like:
5866 \c module $kernel.core
5869 \S{rdfglob} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} Directive\I{GLOBAL,
5872 \c{RDOFF} global symbols can contain additional information needed by
5873 the static linker. You can mark a global symbol as exported, thus
5874 telling the linker do not strip it from target executable or library
5875 file. Like in \c{ELF}, you can also specify whether an exported symbol
5876 is a procedure (function) or data object.
5878 Suffixing the name with a colon and the word \i\c{export} you make the
5881 \c global sys_open:export
5883 To specify that exported symbol is a procedure (function), you add the
5884 word \i\c{proc} or \i\c{function} after declaration:
5886 \c global sys_open:export proc
5888 Similarly, to specify exported data object, add the word \i\c{data}
5889 or \i\c{object} to the directive:
5891 \c global kernel_ticks:export data
5894 \S{rdfimpt} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN} Directive\I{EXTERN,
5897 By default the \c{EXTERN} directive in \c{RDOFF} declares a "pure external"
5898 symbol (i.e. the static linker will complain if such a symbol is not resolved).
5899 To declare an "imported" symbol, which must be resolved later during a dynamic
5900 linking phase, \c{RDOFF} offers an additional \c{import} modifier. As in
5901 \c{GLOBAL}, you can also specify whether an imported symbol is a procedure
5902 (function) or data object. For example:
5905 \c extern _open:import
5906 \c extern _printf:import proc
5907 \c extern _errno:import data
5909 Here the directive \c{LIBRARY} is also included, which gives the dynamic linker
5910 a hint as to where to find requested symbols.
5913 \H{dbgfmt} \i\c{dbg}: Debugging Format
5915 The \c{dbg} output format is not built into NASM in the default
5916 configuration. If you are building your own NASM executable from the
5917 sources, you can define \i\c{OF_DBG} in \c{output/outform.h} or on the
5918 compiler command line, and obtain the \c{dbg} output format.
5920 The \c{dbg} format does not output an object file as such; instead,
5921 it outputs a text file which contains a complete list of all the
5922 transactions between the main body of NASM and the output-format
5923 back end module. It is primarily intended to aid people who want to
5924 write their own output drivers, so that they can get a clearer idea
5925 of the various requests the main program makes of the output driver,
5926 and in what order they happen.
5928 For simple files, one can easily use the \c{dbg} format like this:
5930 \c nasm -f dbg filename.asm
5932 which will generate a diagnostic file called \c{filename.dbg}.
5933 However, this will not work well on files which were designed for a
5934 different object format, because each object format defines its own
5935 macros (usually user-level forms of directives), and those macros
5936 will not be defined in the \c{dbg} format. Therefore it can be
5937 useful to run NASM twice, in order to do the preprocessing with the
5938 native object format selected:
5940 \c nasm -e -f rdf -o rdfprog.i rdfprog.asm
5941 \c nasm -a -f dbg rdfprog.i
5943 This preprocesses \c{rdfprog.asm} into \c{rdfprog.i}, keeping the
5944 \c{rdf} object format selected in order to make sure RDF special
5945 directives are converted into primitive form correctly. Then the
5946 preprocessed source is fed through the \c{dbg} format to generate
5947 the final diagnostic output.
5949 This workaround will still typically not work for programs intended
5950 for \c{obj} format, because the \c{obj} \c{SEGMENT} and \c{GROUP}
5951 directives have side effects of defining the segment and group names
5952 as symbols; \c{dbg} will not do this, so the program will not
5953 assemble. You will have to work around that by defining the symbols
5954 yourself (using \c{EXTERN}, for example) if you really need to get a
5955 \c{dbg} trace of an \c{obj}-specific source file.
5957 \c{dbg} accepts any section name and any directives at all, and logs
5958 them all to its output file.
5961 \C{16bit} Writing 16-bit Code (DOS, Windows 3/3.1)
5963 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues encountered
5964 when writing 16-bit code to run under \c{MS-DOS} or \c{Windows 3.x}. It
5965 covers how to link programs to produce \c{.EXE} or \c{.COM} files,
5966 how to write \c{.SYS} device drivers, and how to interface assembly
5967 language code with 16-bit C compilers and with Borland Pascal.
5970 \H{exefiles} Producing \i\c{.EXE} Files
5972 Any large program written under DOS needs to be built as a \c{.EXE}
5973 file: only \c{.EXE} files have the necessary internal structure
5974 required to span more than one 64K segment. \i{Windows} programs,
5975 also, have to be built as \c{.EXE} files, since Windows does not
5976 support the \c{.COM} format.
5978 In general, you generate \c{.EXE} files by using the \c{obj} output
5979 format to produce one or more \i\c{.OBJ} files, and then linking
5980 them together using a linker. However, NASM also supports the direct
5981 generation of simple DOS \c{.EXE} files using the \c{bin} output
5982 format (by using \c{DB} and \c{DW} to construct the \c{.EXE} file
5983 header), and a macro package is supplied to do this. Thanks to
5984 Yann Guidon for contributing the code for this.
5986 NASM may also support \c{.EXE} natively as another output format in
5990 \S{objexe} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
5992 This section describes the usual method of generating \c{.EXE} files
5993 by linking \c{.OBJ} files together.
5995 Most 16-bit programming language packages come with a suitable
5996 linker; if you have none of these, there is a free linker called
5997 \i{VAL}\I{linker, free}, available in \c{LZH} archive format from
5998 \W{ftp://x2ftp.oulu.fi/pub/msdos/programming/lang/}\i\c{x2ftp.oulu.fi}.
5999 An LZH archiver can be found at
6000 \W{ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/arcers}\i\c{ftp.simtel.net}.
6001 There is another `free' linker (though this one doesn't come with
6002 sources) called \i{FREELINK}, available from
6003 \W{http://www.pcorner.com/tpc/old/3-101.html}\i\c{www.pcorner.com}.
6004 A third, \i\c{djlink}, written by DJ Delorie, is available at
6005 \W{http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/16bit/djlink/}\i\c{www.delorie.com}.
6006 A fourth linker, \i\c{ALINK}, written by Anthony A.J. Williams, is
6007 available at \W{http://alink.sourceforge.net}\i\c{alink.sourceforge.net}.
6009 When linking several \c{.OBJ} files into a \c{.EXE} file, you should
6010 ensure that exactly one of them has a start point defined (using the
6011 \I{program entry point}\i\c{..start} special symbol defined by the
6012 \c{obj} format: see \k{dotdotstart}). If no module defines a start
6013 point, the linker will not know what value to give the entry-point
6014 field in the output file header; if more than one defines a start
6015 point, the linker will not know \e{which} value to use.
6017 An example of a NASM source file which can be assembled to a
6018 \c{.OBJ} file and linked on its own to a \c{.EXE} is given here. It
6019 demonstrates the basic principles of defining a stack, initialising
6020 the segment registers, and declaring a start point. This file is
6021 also provided in the \I{test subdirectory}\c{test} subdirectory of
6022 the NASM archives, under the name \c{objexe.asm}.
6033 This initial piece of code sets up \c{DS} to point to the data
6034 segment, and initializes \c{SS} and \c{SP} to point to the top of
6035 the provided stack. Notice that interrupts are implicitly disabled
6036 for one instruction after a move into \c{SS}, precisely for this
6037 situation, so that there's no chance of an interrupt occurring
6038 between the loads of \c{SS} and \c{SP} and not having a stack to
6041 Note also that the special symbol \c{..start} is defined at the
6042 beginning of this code, which means that will be the entry point
6043 into the resulting executable file.
6049 The above is the main program: load \c{DS:DX} with a pointer to the
6050 greeting message (\c{hello} is implicitly relative to the segment
6051 \c{data}, which was loaded into \c{DS} in the setup code, so the
6052 full pointer is valid), and call the DOS print-string function.
6057 This terminates the program using another DOS system call.
6061 \c hello: db 'hello, world', 13, 10, '$'
6063 The data segment contains the string we want to display.
6065 \c segment stack stack
6069 The above code declares a stack segment containing 64 bytes of
6070 uninitialized stack space, and points \c{stacktop} at the top of it.
6071 The directive \c{segment stack stack} defines a segment \e{called}
6072 \c{stack}, and also of \e{type} \c{STACK}. The latter is not
6073 necessary to the correct running of the program, but linkers are
6074 likely to issue warnings or errors if your program has no segment of
6077 The above file, when assembled into a \c{.OBJ} file, will link on
6078 its own to a valid \c{.EXE} file, which when run will print `hello,
6079 world' and then exit.
6082 \S{binexe} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
6084 The \c{.EXE} file format is simple enough that it's possible to
6085 build a \c{.EXE} file by writing a pure-binary program and sticking
6086 a 32-byte header on the front. This header is simple enough that it
6087 can be generated using \c{DB} and \c{DW} commands by NASM itself, so
6088 that you can use the \c{bin} output format to directly generate
6091 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
6092 subdirectory, is a file \i\c{exebin.mac} of macros. It defines three
6093 macros: \i\c{EXE_begin}, \i\c{EXE_stack} and \i\c{EXE_end}.
6095 To produce a \c{.EXE} file using this method, you should start by
6096 using \c{%include} to load the \c{exebin.mac} macro package into
6097 your source file. You should then issue the \c{EXE_begin} macro call
6098 (which takes no arguments) to generate the file header data. Then
6099 write code as normal for the \c{bin} format - you can use all three
6100 standard sections \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}. At the end of
6101 the file you should call the \c{EXE_end} macro (again, no arguments),
6102 which defines some symbols to mark section sizes, and these symbols
6103 are referred to in the header code generated by \c{EXE_begin}.
6105 In this model, the code you end up writing starts at \c{0x100}, just
6106 like a \c{.COM} file - in fact, if you strip off the 32-byte header
6107 from the resulting \c{.EXE} file, you will have a valid \c{.COM}
6108 program. All the segment bases are the same, so you are limited to a
6109 64K program, again just like a \c{.COM} file. Note that an \c{ORG}
6110 directive is issued by the \c{EXE_begin} macro, so you should not
6111 explicitly issue one of your own.
6113 You can't directly refer to your segment base value, unfortunately,
6114 since this would require a relocation in the header, and things
6115 would get a lot more complicated. So you should get your segment
6116 base by copying it out of \c{CS} instead.
6118 On entry to your \c{.EXE} file, \c{SS:SP} are already set up to
6119 point to the top of a 2Kb stack. You can adjust the default stack
6120 size of 2Kb by calling the \c{EXE_stack} macro. For example, to
6121 change the stack size of your program to 64 bytes, you would call
6124 A sample program which generates a \c{.EXE} file in this way is
6125 given in the \c{test} subdirectory of the NASM archive, as
6129 \H{comfiles} Producing \i\c{.COM} Files
6131 While large DOS programs must be written as \c{.EXE} files, small
6132 ones are often better written as \c{.COM} files. \c{.COM} files are
6133 pure binary, and therefore most easily produced using the \c{bin}
6137 \S{combinfmt} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
6139 \c{.COM} files expect to be loaded at offset \c{100h} into their
6140 segment (though the segment may change). Execution then begins at
6141 \I\c{ORG}\c{100h}, i.e. right at the start of the program. So to
6142 write a \c{.COM} program, you would create a source file looking
6150 \c ; put your code here
6154 \c ; put data items here
6158 \c ; put uninitialized data here
6160 The \c{bin} format puts the \c{.text} section first in the file, so
6161 you can declare data or BSS items before beginning to write code if
6162 you want to and the code will still end up at the front of the file
6165 The BSS (uninitialized data) section does not take up space in the
6166 \c{.COM} file itself: instead, addresses of BSS items are resolved
6167 to point at space beyond the end of the file, on the grounds that
6168 this will be free memory when the program is run. Therefore you
6169 should not rely on your BSS being initialized to all zeros when you
6172 To assemble the above program, you should use a command line like
6174 \c nasm myprog.asm -fbin -o myprog.com
6176 The \c{bin} format would produce a file called \c{myprog} if no
6177 explicit output file name were specified, so you have to override it
6178 and give the desired file name.
6181 \S{comobjfmt} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
6183 If you are writing a \c{.COM} program as more than one module, you
6184 may wish to assemble several \c{.OBJ} files and link them together
6185 into a \c{.COM} program. You can do this, provided you have a linker
6186 capable of outputting \c{.COM} files directly (\i{TLINK} does this),
6187 or alternatively a converter program such as \i\c{EXE2BIN} to
6188 transform the \c{.EXE} file output from the linker into a \c{.COM}
6191 If you do this, you need to take care of several things:
6193 \b The first object file containing code should start its code
6194 segment with a line like \c{RESB 100h}. This is to ensure that the
6195 code begins at offset \c{100h} relative to the beginning of the code
6196 segment, so that the linker or converter program does not have to
6197 adjust address references within the file when generating the
6198 \c{.COM} file. Other assemblers use an \i\c{ORG} directive for this
6199 purpose, but \c{ORG} in NASM is a format-specific directive to the
6200 \c{bin} output format, and does not mean the same thing as it does
6201 in MASM-compatible assemblers.
6203 \b You don't need to define a stack segment.
6205 \b All your segments should be in the same group, so that every time
6206 your code or data references a symbol offset, all offsets are
6207 relative to the same segment base. This is because, when a \c{.COM}
6208 file is loaded, all the segment registers contain the same value.
6211 \H{sysfiles} Producing \i\c{.SYS} Files
6213 \i{MS-DOS device drivers} - \c{.SYS} files - are pure binary files,
6214 similar to \c{.COM} files, except that they start at origin zero
6215 rather than \c{100h}. Therefore, if you are writing a device driver
6216 using the \c{bin} format, you do not need the \c{ORG} directive,
6217 since the default origin for \c{bin} is zero. Similarly, if you are
6218 using \c{obj}, you do not need the \c{RESB 100h} at the start of
6221 \c{.SYS} files start with a header structure, containing pointers to
6222 the various routines inside the driver which do the work. This
6223 structure should be defined at the start of the code segment, even
6224 though it is not actually code.
6226 For more information on the format of \c{.SYS} files, and the data
6227 which has to go in the header structure, a list of books is given in
6228 the Frequently Asked Questions list for the newsgroup
6229 \W{news:comp.os.msdos.programmer}\i\c{comp.os.msdos.programmer}.
6232 \H{16c} Interfacing to 16-bit C Programs
6234 This section covers the basics of writing assembly routines that
6235 call, or are called from, C programs. To do this, you would
6236 typically write an assembly module as a \c{.OBJ} file, and link it
6237 with your C modules to produce a \i{mixed-language program}.
6240 \S{16cunder} External Symbol Names
6242 \I{C symbol names}\I{underscore, in C symbols}C compilers have the
6243 convention that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6244 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6245 appears in the C program. So, for example, the function a C
6246 programmer thinks of as \c{printf} appears to an assembly language
6247 programmer as \c{_printf}. This means that in your assembly
6248 programs, you can define symbols without a leading underscore, and
6249 not have to worry about name clashes with C symbols.
6251 If you find the underscores inconvenient, you can define macros to
6252 replace the \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN} directives as follows:
6268 (These forms of the macros only take one argument at a time; a
6269 \c{%rep} construct could solve this.)
6271 If you then declare an external like this:
6275 then the macro will expand it as
6278 \c %define printf _printf
6280 Thereafter, you can reference \c{printf} as if it was a symbol, and
6281 the preprocessor will put the leading underscore on where necessary.
6283 The \c{cglobal} macro works similarly. You must use \c{cglobal}
6284 before defining the symbol in question, but you would have had to do
6285 that anyway if you used \c{GLOBAL}.
6287 Also see \k{opt-pfix}.
6289 \S{16cmodels} \i{Memory Models}
6291 NASM contains no mechanism to support the various C memory models
6292 directly; you have to keep track yourself of which one you are
6293 writing for. This means you have to keep track of the following
6296 \b In models using a single code segment (tiny, small and compact),
6297 functions are near. This means that function pointers, when stored
6298 in data segments or pushed on the stack as function arguments, are
6299 16 bits long and contain only an offset field (the \c{CS} register
6300 never changes its value, and always gives the segment part of the
6301 full function address), and that functions are called using ordinary
6302 near \c{CALL} instructions and return using \c{RETN} (which, in
6303 NASM, is synonymous with \c{RET} anyway). This means both that you
6304 should write your own routines to return with \c{RETN}, and that you
6305 should call external C routines with near \c{CALL} instructions.
6307 \b In models using more than one code segment (medium, large and
6308 huge), functions are far. This means that function pointers are 32
6309 bits long (consisting of a 16-bit offset followed by a 16-bit
6310 segment), and that functions are called using \c{CALL FAR} (or
6311 \c{CALL seg:offset}) and return using \c{RETF}. Again, you should
6312 therefore write your own routines to return with \c{RETF} and use
6313 \c{CALL FAR} to call external routines.
6315 \b In models using a single data segment (tiny, small and medium),
6316 data pointers are 16 bits long, containing only an offset field (the
6317 \c{DS} register doesn't change its value, and always gives the
6318 segment part of the full data item address).
6320 \b In models using more than one data segment (compact, large and
6321 huge), data pointers are 32 bits long, consisting of a 16-bit offset
6322 followed by a 16-bit segment. You should still be careful not to
6323 modify \c{DS} in your routines without restoring it afterwards, but
6324 \c{ES} is free for you to use to access the contents of 32-bit data
6325 pointers you are passed.
6327 \b The huge memory model allows single data items to exceed 64K in
6328 size. In all other memory models, you can access the whole of a data
6329 item just by doing arithmetic on the offset field of the pointer you
6330 are given, whether a segment field is present or not; in huge model,
6331 you have to be more careful of your pointer arithmetic.
6333 \b In most memory models, there is a \e{default} data segment, whose
6334 segment address is kept in \c{DS} throughout the program. This data
6335 segment is typically the same segment as the stack, kept in \c{SS},
6336 so that functions' local variables (which are stored on the stack)
6337 and global data items can both be accessed easily without changing
6338 \c{DS}. Particularly large data items are typically stored in other
6339 segments. However, some memory models (though not the standard
6340 ones, usually) allow the assumption that \c{SS} and \c{DS} hold the
6341 same value to be removed. Be careful about functions' local
6342 variables in this latter case.
6344 In models with a single code segment, the segment is called
6345 \i\c{_TEXT}, so your code segment must also go by this name in order
6346 to be linked into the same place as the main code segment. In models
6347 with a single data segment, or with a default data segment, it is
6351 \S{16cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6353 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention} in
6354 16-bit programs is as follows. In the following description, the
6355 words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote the function
6356 doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6358 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6359 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6360 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6362 \b The caller then executes a \c{CALL} instruction to pass control
6363 to the callee. This \c{CALL} is either near or far depending on the
6366 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6367 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6368 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6369 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6370 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6371 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6372 any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as
6373 a \i\e{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6375 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6376 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6377 pushed; the next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6378 return address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. In a small-model
6379 (near) function, the parameters start after that, at \c{[BP+4]}; in
6380 a large-model (far) function, the segment part of the return address
6381 lives at \c{[BP+4]}, and the parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The
6382 leftmost parameter of the function, since it was pushed last, is
6383 accessible at this offset from \c{BP}; the others follow, at
6384 successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function such as \c{printf}
6385 which takes a variable number of parameters, the pushing of the
6386 parameters in reverse order means that the function knows where to
6387 find its first parameter, which tells it the number and type of the
6390 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6391 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6392 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6394 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6395 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6396 of the value. Floating-point results are sometimes (depending on the
6397 compiler) returned in \c{ST0}.
6399 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6400 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6401 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETN} or \c{RETF} depending on
6404 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6405 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
6406 constant to \c{SP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
6407 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
6408 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
6409 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
6410 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
6413 It is instructive to compare this calling convention with that for
6414 Pascal programs (described in \k{16bpfunc}). Pascal has a simpler
6415 convention, since no functions have variable numbers of parameters.
6416 Therefore the callee knows how many parameters it should have been
6417 passed, and is able to deallocate them from the stack itself by
6418 passing an immediate argument to the \c{RET} or \c{RETF}
6419 instruction, so the caller does not have to do it. Also, the
6420 parameters are pushed in left-to-right order, not right-to-left,
6421 which means that a compiler can give better guarantees about
6422 sequence points without performance suffering.
6424 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way.
6425 The following example is for small model:
6432 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6433 \c mov bx,[bp+4] ; first parameter to function
6437 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6441 For a large-model function, you would replace \c{RET} by \c{RETF},
6442 and look for the first parameter at \c{[BP+6]} instead of
6443 \c{[BP+4]}. Of course, if one of the parameters is a pointer, then
6444 the offsets of \e{subsequent} parameters will change depending on
6445 the memory model as well: far pointers take up four bytes on the
6446 stack when passed as a parameter, whereas near pointers take up two.
6448 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
6449 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6453 \c ; and then, further down...
6455 \c push word [myint] ; one of my integer variables
6456 \c push word mystring ; pointer into my data segment
6458 \c add sp,byte 4 ; `byte' saves space
6460 \c ; then those data items...
6465 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
6467 This piece of code is the small-model assembly equivalent of the C
6470 \c int myint = 1234;
6471 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
6473 In large model, the function-call code might look more like this. In
6474 this example, it is assumed that \c{DS} already holds the segment
6475 base of the segment \c{_DATA}. If not, you would have to initialize
6478 \c push word [myint]
6479 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6480 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6484 The integer value still takes up one word on the stack, since large
6485 model does not affect the size of the \c{int} data type. The first
6486 argument (pushed last) to \c{printf}, however, is a data pointer,
6487 and therefore has to contain a segment and offset part. The segment
6488 should be stored second in memory, and therefore must be pushed
6489 first. (Of course, \c{PUSH DS} would have been a shorter instruction
6490 than \c{PUSH WORD SEG mystring}, if \c{DS} was set up as the above
6491 example assumed.) Then the actual call becomes a far call, since
6492 functions expect far calls in large model; and \c{SP} has to be
6493 increased by 6 rather than 4 afterwards to make up for the extra
6497 \S{16cdata} Accessing Data Items
6499 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
6500 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
6501 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
6502 in \k{16cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
6503 accessed from assembler as
6509 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
6510 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
6511 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
6517 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
6518 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are two bytes long, so if
6519 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
6520 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+6]}. (The byte offset 6 is obtained
6521 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
6522 element, 2.) The sizes of the C base types in 16-bit compilers are:
6523 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short} and \c{int}, 4 for \c{long} and
6524 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}.
6526 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
6527 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
6528 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
6529 NASM structure definition (using \i\c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
6530 one offset and using just that.
6532 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
6533 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
6534 alignment to structure members in its own \c{STRUC} macro, so you
6535 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
6536 Typically, you might find that a structure like
6543 might be four bytes long rather than three, since the \c{int} field
6544 would be aligned to a two-byte boundary. However, this sort of
6545 feature tends to be a configurable option in the C compiler, either
6546 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
6547 out how your own compiler does it.
6550 \S{16cmacro} \i\c{c16.mac}: Helper Macros for the 16-bit C Interface
6552 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
6553 directory, is a file \c{c16.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
6554 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
6555 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
6556 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
6558 (An alternative, TASM compatible form of \c{arg} is also now built
6559 into NASM's preprocessor. See \k{stackrel} for details.)
6561 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
6568 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6569 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6574 This defines \c{_nearproc} to be a procedure taking two arguments,
6575 the first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
6576 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
6578 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
6579 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
6580 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
6581 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
6582 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
6583 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
6584 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
6586 The macro set produces code for near functions (tiny, small and
6587 compact-model code) by default. You can have it generate far
6588 functions (medium, large and huge-model code) by means of coding
6589 \I\c{FARCODE}\c{%define FARCODE}. This changes the kind of return
6590 instruction generated by \c{endproc}, and also changes the starting
6591 point for the argument offsets. The macro set contains no intrinsic
6592 dependency on whether data pointers are far or not.
6594 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
6595 argument. If no size is given, 2 is assumed, since it is likely that
6596 many function parameters will be of type \c{int}.
6598 The large-model equivalent of the above function would look like this:
6606 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6607 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6608 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6613 This makes use of the argument to the \c{arg} macro to define a
6614 parameter of size 4, because \c{j} is now a far pointer. When we
6615 load from \c{j}, we must load a segment and an offset.
6618 \H{16bp} Interfacing to \i{Borland Pascal} Programs
6620 Interfacing to Borland Pascal programs is similar in concept to
6621 interfacing to 16-bit C programs. The differences are:
6623 \b The leading underscore required for interfacing to C programs is
6624 not required for Pascal.
6626 \b The memory model is always large: functions are far, data
6627 pointers are far, and no data item can be more than 64K long.
6628 (Actually, some functions are near, but only those functions that
6629 are local to a Pascal unit and never called from outside it. All
6630 assembly functions that Pascal calls, and all Pascal functions that
6631 assembly routines are able to call, are far.) However, all static
6632 data declared in a Pascal program goes into the default data
6633 segment, which is the one whose segment address will be in \c{DS}
6634 when control is passed to your assembly code. The only things that
6635 do not live in the default data segment are local variables (they
6636 live in the stack segment) and dynamically allocated variables. All
6637 data \e{pointers}, however, are far.
6639 \b The function calling convention is different - described below.
6641 \b Some data types, such as strings, are stored differently.
6643 \b There are restrictions on the segment names you are allowed to
6644 use - Borland Pascal will ignore code or data declared in a segment
6645 it doesn't like the name of. The restrictions are described below.
6648 \S{16bpfunc} The Pascal Calling Convention
6650 \I{functions, Pascal calling convention}\I{Pascal calling
6651 convention}The 16-bit Pascal calling convention is as follows. In
6652 the following description, the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are
6653 used to denote the function doing the calling and the function which
6656 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6657 after another, in normal order (left to right, so that the first
6658 argument specified to the function is pushed first).
6660 \b The caller then executes a far \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6661 control to the callee.
6663 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6664 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6665 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6666 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6667 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6668 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6669 any function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as a
6670 \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6672 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6673 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6674 pushed. The next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6675 return address, and the next one at \c{[BP+4]} the segment part. The
6676 parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The rightmost parameter of the
6677 function, since it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset
6678 from \c{BP}; the others follow, at successively greater offsets.
6680 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6681 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6682 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6684 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6685 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6686 of the value. Floating-point results are returned in \c{ST0}.
6687 Results of type \c{Real} (Borland's own custom floating-point data
6688 type, not handled directly by the FPU) are returned in \c{DX:BX:AX}.
6689 To return a result of type \c{String}, the caller pushes a pointer
6690 to a temporary string before pushing the parameters, and the callee
6691 places the returned string value at that location. The pointer is
6692 not a parameter, and should not be removed from the stack by the
6693 \c{RETF} instruction.
6695 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6696 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6697 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETF}. It uses the form of
6698 \c{RETF} with an immediate parameter, giving the number of bytes
6699 taken up by the parameters on the stack. This causes the parameters
6700 to be removed from the stack as a side effect of the return
6703 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6704 parameters have already been removed from the stack, so it needs to
6707 Thus, you would define a function in Pascal style, taking two
6708 \c{Integer}-type parameters, in the following way:
6714 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6715 \c mov bx,[bp+8] ; first parameter to function
6716 \c mov bx,[bp+6] ; second parameter to function
6720 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6722 \c retf 4 ; total size of params is 4
6724 At the other end of the process, to call a Pascal function from your
6725 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6729 \c ; and then, further down...
6731 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6732 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6733 \c push word [myint] ; one of my variables
6734 \c call far SomeFunc
6736 This is equivalent to the Pascal code
6738 \c procedure SomeFunc(String: PChar; Int: Integer);
6739 \c SomeFunc(@mystring, myint);
6742 \S{16bpseg} Borland Pascal \I{segment names, Borland Pascal}Segment
6745 Since Borland Pascal's internal unit file format is completely
6746 different from \c{OBJ}, it only makes a very sketchy job of actually
6747 reading and understanding the various information contained in a
6748 real \c{OBJ} file when it links that in. Therefore an object file
6749 intended to be linked to a Pascal program must obey a number of
6752 \b Procedures and functions must be in a segment whose name is
6753 either \c{CODE}, \c{CSEG}, or something ending in \c{_TEXT}.
6755 \b initialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6756 \c{CONST} or something ending in \c{_DATA}.
6758 \b Uninitialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6759 \c{DATA}, \c{DSEG}, or something ending in \c{_BSS}.
6761 \b Any other segments in the object file are completely ignored.
6762 \c{GROUP} directives and segment attributes are also ignored.
6765 \S{16bpmacro} Using \i\c{c16.mac} With Pascal Programs
6767 The \c{c16.mac} macro package, described in \k{16cmacro}, can also
6768 be used to simplify writing functions to be called from Pascal
6769 programs, if you code \I\c{PASCAL}\c{%define PASCAL}. This
6770 definition ensures that functions are far (it implies
6771 \i\c{FARCODE}), and also causes procedure return instructions to be
6772 generated with an operand.
6774 Defining \c{PASCAL} does not change the code which calculates the
6775 argument offsets; you must declare your function's arguments in
6776 reverse order. For example:
6784 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6785 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6786 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6791 This defines the same routine, conceptually, as the example in
6792 \k{16cmacro}: it defines a function taking two arguments, an integer
6793 and a pointer to an integer, which returns the sum of the integer
6794 and the contents of the pointer. The only difference between this
6795 code and the large-model C version is that \c{PASCAL} is defined
6796 instead of \c{FARCODE}, and that the arguments are declared in
6800 \C{32bit} Writing 32-bit Code (Unix, Win32, DJGPP)
6802 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved
6803 when writing 32-bit code, to run under \i{Win32} or Unix, or to be
6804 linked with C code generated by a Unix-style C compiler such as
6805 \i{DJGPP}. It covers how to write assembly code to interface with
6806 32-bit C routines, and how to write position-independent code for
6809 Almost all 32-bit code, and in particular all code running under
6810 \c{Win32}, \c{DJGPP} or any of the PC Unix variants, runs in \I{flat
6811 memory model}\e{flat} memory model. This means that the segment registers
6812 and paging have already been set up to give you the same 32-bit 4Gb
6813 address space no matter what segment you work relative to, and that
6814 you should ignore all segment registers completely. When writing
6815 flat-model application code, you never need to use a segment
6816 override or modify any segment register, and the code-section
6817 addresses you pass to \c{CALL} and \c{JMP} live in the same address
6818 space as the data-section addresses you access your variables by and
6819 the stack-section addresses you access local variables and procedure
6820 parameters by. Every address is 32 bits long and contains only an
6824 \H{32c} Interfacing to 32-bit C Programs
6826 A lot of the discussion in \k{16c}, about interfacing to 16-bit C
6827 programs, still applies when working in 32 bits. The absence of
6828 memory models or segmentation worries simplifies things a lot.
6831 \S{32cunder} External Symbol Names
6833 Most 32-bit C compilers share the convention used by 16-bit
6834 compilers, that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6835 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6836 appears in the C program. However, not all of them do: the \c{ELF}
6837 specification states that C symbols do \e{not} have a leading
6838 underscore on their assembly-language names.
6840 The older Linux \c{a.out} C compiler, all \c{Win32} compilers,
6841 \c{DJGPP}, and \c{NetBSD} and \c{FreeBSD}, all use the leading
6842 underscore; for these compilers, the macros \c{cextern} and
6843 \c{cglobal}, as given in \k{16cunder}, will still work. For \c{ELF},
6844 though, the leading underscore should not be used.
6846 See also \k{opt-pfix}.
6848 \S{32cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6850 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention}
6851 in 32-bit programs is as follows. In the following description,
6852 the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote
6853 the function doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6855 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6856 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6857 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6859 \b The caller then executes a near \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6860 control to the callee.
6862 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6863 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6864 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{ESP} in \c{EBP} so as
6865 to be able to use \c{EBP} as a base pointer to find its parameters
6866 on the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so
6867 part of the calling convention states that \c{EBP} must be preserved
6868 by any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up
6869 \c{EBP} as a \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6871 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{EBP}.
6872 The doubleword at \c{[EBP]} holds the previous value of \c{EBP} as
6873 it was pushed; the next doubleword, at \c{[EBP+4]}, holds the return
6874 address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. The parameters start after
6875 that, at \c{[EBP+8]}. The leftmost parameter of the function, since
6876 it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset from \c{EBP}; the
6877 others follow, at successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function
6878 such as \c{printf} which takes a variable number of parameters, the
6879 pushing of the parameters in reverse order means that the function
6880 knows where to find its first parameter, which tells it the number
6881 and type of the remaining ones.
6883 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{ESP} further, so as to
6884 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6885 accessible at negative offsets from \c{EBP}.
6887 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6888 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{EAX} depending on the size
6889 of the value. Floating-point results are typically returned in
6892 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{ESP} from
6893 \c{EBP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6894 value of \c{EBP}, and returns via \c{RET} (equivalently, \c{RETN}).
6896 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6897 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
6898 constant to \c{ESP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
6899 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
6900 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
6901 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
6902 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
6905 There is an alternative calling convention used by Win32 programs
6906 for Windows API calls, and also for functions called \e{by} the
6907 Windows API such as window procedures: they follow what Microsoft
6908 calls the \c{__stdcall} convention. This is slightly closer to the
6909 Pascal convention, in that the callee clears the stack by passing a
6910 parameter to the \c{RET} instruction. However, the parameters are
6911 still pushed in right-to-left order.
6913 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way:
6920 \c sub esp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6921 \c mov ebx,[ebp+8] ; first parameter to function
6925 \c leave ; mov esp,ebp / pop ebp
6928 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
6929 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6933 \c ; and then, further down...
6935 \c push dword [myint] ; one of my integer variables
6936 \c push dword mystring ; pointer into my data segment
6938 \c add esp,byte 8 ; `byte' saves space
6940 \c ; then those data items...
6945 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
6947 This piece of code is the assembly equivalent of the C code
6949 \c int myint = 1234;
6950 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
6953 \S{32cdata} Accessing Data Items
6955 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
6956 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
6957 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
6958 in \k{32cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
6959 accessed from assembler as
6964 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
6965 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
6966 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
6971 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
6972 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are four bytes long, so if
6973 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
6974 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+12]}. (The byte offset 12 is obtained
6975 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
6976 element, 4.) The sizes of the C base types in 32-bit compilers are:
6977 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short}, 4 for \c{int}, \c{long} and
6978 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}. Pointers, being 32-bit addresses,
6979 are also 4 bytes long.
6981 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
6982 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
6983 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
6984 NASM structure definition (using \c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
6985 one offset and using just that.
6987 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
6988 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
6989 alignment to structure members in its own \i\c{STRUC} macro, so you
6990 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
6991 Typically, you might find that a structure like
6998 might be eight bytes long rather than five, since the \c{int} field
6999 would be aligned to a four-byte boundary. However, this sort of
7000 feature is sometimes a configurable option in the C compiler, either
7001 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
7002 out how your own compiler does it.
7005 \S{32cmacro} \i\c{c32.mac}: Helper Macros for the 32-bit C Interface
7007 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc directory}\c{misc}
7008 directory, is a file \c{c32.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
7009 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
7010 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
7011 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
7013 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
7020 \c mov eax,[ebp + %$i]
7021 \c mov ebx,[ebp + %$j]
7026 This defines \c{_proc32} to be a procedure taking two arguments, the
7027 first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
7028 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
7030 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
7031 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
7032 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
7033 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
7034 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
7035 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
7036 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
7038 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
7039 argument. If no size is given, 4 is assumed, since it is likely that
7040 many function parameters will be of type \c{int} or pointers.
7043 \H{picdll} Writing NetBSD/FreeBSD/OpenBSD and Linux/ELF \i{Shared
7046 \c{ELF} replaced the older \c{a.out} object file format under Linux
7047 because it contains support for \i{position-independent code}
7048 (\i{PIC}), which makes writing shared libraries much easier. NASM
7049 supports the \c{ELF} position-independent code features, so you can
7050 write Linux \c{ELF} shared libraries in NASM.
7052 \i{NetBSD}, and its close cousins \i{FreeBSD} and \i{OpenBSD}, take
7053 a different approach by hacking PIC support into the \c{a.out}
7054 format. NASM supports this as the \i\c{aoutb} output format, so you
7055 can write \i{BSD} shared libraries in NASM too.
7057 The operating system loads a PIC shared library by memory-mapping
7058 the library file at an arbitrarily chosen point in the address space
7059 of the running process. The contents of the library's code section
7060 must therefore not depend on where it is loaded in memory.
7062 Therefore, you cannot get at your variables by writing code like
7065 \c mov eax,[myvar] ; WRONG
7067 Instead, the linker provides an area of memory called the
7068 \i\e{global offset table}, or \i{GOT}; the GOT is situated at a
7069 constant distance from your library's code, so if you can find out
7070 where your library is loaded (which is typically done using a
7071 \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination), you can obtain the address of the
7072 GOT, and you can then load the addresses of your variables out of
7073 linker-generated entries in the GOT.
7075 The \e{data} section of a PIC shared library does not have these
7076 restrictions: since the data section is writable, it has to be
7077 copied into memory anyway rather than just paged in from the library
7078 file, so as long as it's being copied it can be relocated too. So
7079 you can put ordinary types of relocation in the data section without
7080 too much worry (but see \k{picglobal} for a caveat).
7083 \S{picgot} Obtaining the Address of the GOT
7085 Each code module in your shared library should define the GOT as an
7088 \c extern _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in ELF
7089 \c extern __GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in BSD a.out
7091 At the beginning of any function in your shared library which plans
7092 to access your data or BSS sections, you must first calculate the
7093 address of the GOT. This is typically done by writing the function
7102 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-.get_GOT wrt ..gotpc
7104 \c ; the function body comes here
7111 (For BSD, again, the symbol \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE} requires a
7112 second leading underscore.)
7114 The first two lines of this function are simply the standard C
7115 prologue to set up a stack frame, and the last three lines are
7116 standard C function epilogue. The third line, and the fourth to last
7117 line, save and restore the \c{EBX} register, because PIC shared
7118 libraries use this register to store the address of the GOT.
7120 The interesting bit is the \c{CALL} instruction and the following
7121 two lines. The \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination obtains the address
7122 of the label \c{.get_GOT}, without having to know in advance where
7123 the program was loaded (since the \c{CALL} instruction is encoded
7124 relative to the current position). The \c{ADD} instruction makes use
7125 of one of the special PIC relocation types: \i{GOTPC relocation}.
7126 With the \i\c{WRT ..gotpc} qualifier specified, the symbol
7127 referenced (here \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_}, the special symbol
7128 assigned to the GOT) is given as an offset from the beginning of the
7129 section. (Actually, \c{ELF} encodes it as the offset from the operand
7130 field of the \c{ADD} instruction, but NASM simplifies this
7131 deliberately, so you do things the same way for both \c{ELF} and
7132 \c{BSD}.) So the instruction then \e{adds} the beginning of the section,
7133 to get the real address of the GOT, and subtracts the value of
7134 \c{.get_GOT} which it knows is in \c{EBX}. Therefore, by the time
7135 that instruction has finished, \c{EBX} contains the address of the GOT.
7137 If you didn't follow that, don't worry: it's never necessary to
7138 obtain the address of the GOT by any other means, so you can put
7139 those three instructions into a macro and safely ignore them:
7146 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-%%getgot wrt ..gotpc
7150 \S{piclocal} Finding Your Local Data Items
7152 Having got the GOT, you can then use it to obtain the addresses of
7153 your data items. Most variables will reside in the sections you have
7154 declared; they can be accessed using the \I{GOTOFF
7155 relocation}\c{..gotoff} special \I\c{WRT ..gotoff}\c{WRT} type. The
7156 way this works is like this:
7158 \c lea eax,[ebx+myvar wrt ..gotoff]
7160 The expression \c{myvar wrt ..gotoff} is calculated, when the shared
7161 library is linked, to be the offset to the local variable \c{myvar}
7162 from the beginning of the GOT. Therefore, adding it to \c{EBX} as
7163 above will place the real address of \c{myvar} in \c{EAX}.
7165 If you declare variables as \c{GLOBAL} without specifying a size for
7166 them, they are shared between code modules in the library, but do
7167 not get exported from the library to the program that loaded it.
7168 They will still be in your ordinary data and BSS sections, so you
7169 can access them in the same way as local variables, using the above
7170 \c{..gotoff} mechanism.
7172 Note that due to a peculiarity of the way BSD \c{a.out} format
7173 handles this relocation type, there must be at least one non-local
7174 symbol in the same section as the address you're trying to access.
7177 \S{picextern} Finding External and Common Data Items
7179 If your library needs to get at an external variable (external to
7180 the \e{library}, not just to one of the modules within it), you must
7181 use the \I{GOT relocations}\I\c{WRT ..got}\c{..got} type to get at
7182 it. The \c{..got} type, instead of giving you the offset from the
7183 GOT base to the variable, gives you the offset from the GOT base to
7184 a GOT \e{entry} containing the address of the variable. The linker
7185 will set up this GOT entry when it builds the library, and the
7186 dynamic linker will place the correct address in it at load time. So
7187 to obtain the address of an external variable \c{extvar} in \c{EAX},
7190 \c mov eax,[ebx+extvar wrt ..got]
7192 This loads the address of \c{extvar} out of an entry in the GOT. The
7193 linker, when it builds the shared library, collects together every
7194 relocation of type \c{..got}, and builds the GOT so as to ensure it
7195 has every necessary entry present.
7197 Common variables must also be accessed in this way.
7200 \S{picglobal} Exporting Symbols to the Library User
7202 If you want to export symbols to the user of the library, you have
7203 to declare whether they are functions or data, and if they are data,
7204 you have to give the size of the data item. This is because the
7205 dynamic linker has to build \I{PLT}\i{procedure linkage table}
7206 entries for any exported functions, and also moves exported data
7207 items away from the library's data section in which they were
7210 So to export a function to users of the library, you must use
7212 \c global func:function ; declare it as a function
7218 And to export a data item such as an array, you would have to code
7220 \c global array:data array.end-array ; give the size too
7225 Be careful: If you export a variable to the library user, by
7226 declaring it as \c{GLOBAL} and supplying a size, the variable will
7227 end up living in the data section of the main program, rather than
7228 in your library's data section, where you declared it. So you will
7229 have to access your own global variable with the \c{..got} mechanism
7230 rather than \c{..gotoff}, as if it were external (which,
7231 effectively, it has become).
7233 Equally, if you need to store the address of an exported global in
7234 one of your data sections, you can't do it by means of the standard
7237 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item ; WRONG
7239 NASM will interpret this code as an ordinary relocation, in which
7240 \c{global_data_item} is merely an offset from the beginning of the
7241 \c{.data} section (or whatever); so this reference will end up
7242 pointing at your data section instead of at the exported global
7243 which resides elsewhere.
7245 Instead of the above code, then, you must write
7247 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item wrt ..sym
7249 which makes use of the special \c{WRT} type \I\c{WRT ..sym}\c{..sym}
7250 to instruct NASM to search the symbol table for a particular symbol
7251 at that address, rather than just relocating by section base.
7253 Either method will work for functions: referring to one of your
7254 functions by means of
7256 \c funcptr: dd my_function
7258 will give the user the address of the code you wrote, whereas
7260 \c funcptr: dd my_function wrt ..sym
7262 will give the address of the procedure linkage table for the
7263 function, which is where the calling program will \e{believe} the
7264 function lives. Either address is a valid way to call the function.
7267 \S{picproc} Calling Procedures Outside the Library
7269 Calling procedures outside your shared library has to be done by
7270 means of a \i\e{procedure linkage table}, or \i{PLT}. The PLT is
7271 placed at a known offset from where the library is loaded, so the
7272 library code can make calls to the PLT in a position-independent
7273 way. Within the PLT there is code to jump to offsets contained in
7274 the GOT, so function calls to other shared libraries or to routines
7275 in the main program can be transparently passed off to their real
7278 To call an external routine, you must use another special PIC
7279 relocation type, \I{PLT relocations}\i\c{WRT ..plt}. This is much
7280 easier than the GOT-based ones: you simply replace calls such as
7281 \c{CALL printf} with the PLT-relative version \c{CALL printf WRT
7285 \S{link} Generating the Library File
7287 Having written some code modules and assembled them to \c{.o} files,
7288 you then generate your shared library with a command such as
7290 \c ld -shared -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for ELF
7291 \c ld -Bshareable -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for BSD
7293 For ELF, if your shared library is going to reside in system
7294 directories such as \c{/usr/lib} or \c{/lib}, it is usually worth
7295 using the \i\c{-soname} flag to the linker, to store the final
7296 library file name, with a version number, into the library:
7298 \c ld -shared -soname library.so.1 -o library.so.1.2 *.o
7300 You would then copy \c{library.so.1.2} into the library directory,
7301 and create \c{library.so.1} as a symbolic link to it.
7304 \C{mixsize} Mixing 16 and 32 Bit Code
7306 This chapter tries to cover some of the issues, largely related to
7307 unusual forms of addressing and jump instructions, encountered when
7308 writing operating system code such as protected-mode initialisation
7309 routines, which require code that operates in mixed segment sizes,
7310 such as code in a 16-bit segment trying to modify data in a 32-bit
7311 one, or jumps between different-size segments.
7314 \H{mixjump} Mixed-Size Jumps\I{jumps, mixed-size}
7316 \I{operating system, writing}\I{writing operating systems}The most
7317 common form of \i{mixed-size instruction} is the one used when
7318 writing a 32-bit OS: having done your setup in 16-bit mode, such as
7319 loading the kernel, you then have to boot it by switching into
7320 protected mode and jumping to the 32-bit kernel start address. In a
7321 fully 32-bit OS, this tends to be the \e{only} mixed-size
7322 instruction you need, since everything before it can be done in pure
7323 16-bit code, and everything after it can be pure 32-bit.
7325 This jump must specify a 48-bit far address, since the target
7326 segment is a 32-bit one. However, it must be assembled in a 16-bit
7327 segment, so just coding, for example,
7329 \c jmp 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; wrong!
7331 will not work, since the offset part of the address will be
7332 truncated to \c{0x9ABC} and the jump will be an ordinary 16-bit far
7335 The Linux kernel setup code gets round the inability of \c{as86} to
7336 generate the required instruction by coding it manually, using
7337 \c{DB} instructions. NASM can go one better than that, by actually
7338 generating the right instruction itself. Here's how to do it right:
7340 \c jmp dword 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; right
7342 \I\c{JMP DWORD}The \c{DWORD} prefix (strictly speaking, it should
7343 come \e{after} the colon, since it is declaring the \e{offset} field
7344 to be a doubleword; but NASM will accept either form, since both are
7345 unambiguous) forces the offset part to be treated as far, in the
7346 assumption that you are deliberately writing a jump from a 16-bit
7347 segment to a 32-bit one.
7349 You can do the reverse operation, jumping from a 32-bit segment to a
7350 16-bit one, by means of the \c{WORD} prefix:
7352 \c jmp word 0x8765:0x4321 ; 32 to 16 bit
7354 If the \c{WORD} prefix is specified in 16-bit mode, or the \c{DWORD}
7355 prefix in 32-bit mode, they will be ignored, since each is
7356 explicitly forcing NASM into a mode it was in anyway.
7359 \H{mixaddr} Addressing Between Different-Size Segments\I{addressing,
7360 mixed-size}\I{mixed-size addressing}
7362 If your OS is mixed 16 and 32-bit, or if you are writing a DOS
7363 extender, you are likely to have to deal with some 16-bit segments
7364 and some 32-bit ones. At some point, you will probably end up
7365 writing code in a 16-bit segment which has to access data in a
7366 32-bit segment, or vice versa.
7368 If the data you are trying to access in a 32-bit segment lies within
7369 the first 64K of the segment, you may be able to get away with using
7370 an ordinary 16-bit addressing operation for the purpose; but sooner
7371 or later, you will want to do 32-bit addressing from 16-bit mode.
7373 The easiest way to do this is to make sure you use a register for
7374 the address, since any effective address containing a 32-bit
7375 register is forced to be a 32-bit address. So you can do
7377 \c mov eax,offset_into_32_bit_segment_specified_by_fs
7378 \c mov dword [fs:eax],0x11223344
7380 This is fine, but slightly cumbersome (since it wastes an
7381 instruction and a register) if you already know the precise offset
7382 you are aiming at. The x86 architecture does allow 32-bit effective
7383 addresses to specify nothing but a 4-byte offset, so why shouldn't
7384 NASM be able to generate the best instruction for the purpose?
7386 It can. As in \k{mixjump}, you need only prefix the address with the
7387 \c{DWORD} keyword, and it will be forced to be a 32-bit address:
7389 \c mov dword [fs:dword my_offset],0x11223344
7391 Also as in \k{mixjump}, NASM is not fussy about whether the
7392 \c{DWORD} prefix comes before or after the segment override, so
7393 arguably a nicer-looking way to code the above instruction is
7395 \c mov dword [dword fs:my_offset],0x11223344
7397 Don't confuse the \c{DWORD} prefix \e{outside} the square brackets,
7398 which controls the size of the data stored at the address, with the
7399 one \c{inside} the square brackets which controls the length of the
7400 address itself. The two can quite easily be different:
7402 \c mov word [dword 0x12345678],0x9ABC
7404 This moves 16 bits of data to an address specified by a 32-bit
7407 You can also specify \c{WORD} or \c{DWORD} prefixes along with the
7408 \c{FAR} prefix to indirect far jumps or calls. For example:
7410 \c call dword far [fs:word 0x4321]
7412 This instruction contains an address specified by a 16-bit offset;
7413 it loads a 48-bit far pointer from that (16-bit segment and 32-bit
7414 offset), and calls that address.
7417 \H{mixother} Other Mixed-Size Instructions
7419 The other way you might want to access data might be using the
7420 string instructions (\c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx} and so on) or the
7421 \c{XLATB} instruction. These instructions, since they take no
7422 parameters, might seem to have no easy way to make them perform
7423 32-bit addressing when assembled in a 16-bit segment.
7425 This is the purpose of NASM's \i\c{a16}, \i\c{a32} and \i\c{a64} prefixes. If
7426 you are coding \c{LODSB} in a 16-bit segment but it is supposed to
7427 be accessing a string in a 32-bit segment, you should load the
7428 desired address into \c{ESI} and then code
7432 The prefix forces the addressing size to 32 bits, meaning that
7433 \c{LODSB} loads from \c{[DS:ESI]} instead of \c{[DS:SI]}. To access
7434 a string in a 16-bit segment when coding in a 32-bit one, the
7435 corresponding \c{a16} prefix can be used.
7437 The \c{a16}, \c{a32} and \c{a64} prefixes can be applied to any instruction
7438 in NASM's instruction table, but most of them can generate all the
7439 useful forms without them. The prefixes are necessary only for
7440 instructions with implicit addressing:
7441 \# \c{CMPSx} (\k{insCMPSB}),
7442 \# \c{SCASx} (\k{insSCASB}), \c{LODSx} (\k{insLODSB}), \c{STOSx}
7443 \# (\k{insSTOSB}), \c{MOVSx} (\k{insMOVSB}), \c{INSx} (\k{insINSB}),
7444 \# \c{OUTSx} (\k{insOUTSB}), and \c{XLATB} (\k{insXLATB}).
7445 \c{CMPSx}, \c{SCASx}, \c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx}, \c{MOVSx}, \c{INSx},
7446 \c{OUTSx}, and \c{XLATB}.
7448 various push and pop instructions (\c{PUSHA} and \c{POPF} as well as
7449 the more usual \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}) can accept \c{a16}, \c{a32} or \c{a64}
7450 prefixes to force a particular one of \c{SP}, \c{ESP} or \c{RSP} to be used
7451 as a stack pointer, in case the stack segment in use is a different
7452 size from the code segment.
7454 \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}, when applied to segment registers in 32-bit
7455 mode, also have the slightly odd behaviour that they push and pop 4
7456 bytes at a time, of which the top two are ignored and the bottom two
7457 give the value of the segment register being manipulated. To force
7458 the 16-bit behaviour of segment-register push and pop instructions,
7459 you can use the operand-size prefix \i\c{o16}:
7464 This code saves a doubleword of stack space by fitting two segment
7465 registers into the space which would normally be consumed by pushing
7468 (You can also use the \i\c{o32} prefix to force the 32-bit behaviour
7469 when in 16-bit mode, but this seems less useful.)
7472 \C{64bit} Writing 64-bit Code (Unix, Win64)
7474 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved when
7475 writing 64-bit code, to run under \i{Win64} or Unix. It covers how to
7476 write assembly code to interface with 64-bit C routines, and how to
7477 write position-independent code for shared libraries.
7479 All 64-bit code uses a flat memory model, since segmentation is not
7480 available in 64-bit mode. The one exception is the \c{FS} and \c{GS}
7481 registers, which still add their bases.
7483 Position independence in 64-bit mode is significantly simpler, since
7484 the processor supports \c{RIP}-relative addressing directly; see the
7485 \c{REL} keyword (\k{effaddr}). On most 64-bit platforms, it is
7486 probably desirable to make that the default, using the directive
7487 \c{DEFAULT REL} (\k{default}).
7489 64-bit programming is relatively similar to 32-bit programming, but
7490 of course pointers are 64 bits long; additionally, all existing
7491 platforms pass arguments in registers rather than on the stack.
7492 Furthermore, 64-bit platforms use SSE2 by default for floating point.
7493 Please see the ABI documentation for your platform.
7495 64-bit platforms differ in the sizes of the fundamental datatypes, not
7496 just from 32-bit platforms but from each other. If a specific size
7497 data type is desired, it is probably best to use the types defined in
7498 the Standard C header \c{<inttypes.h>}.
7500 In 64-bit mode, the default instruction size is still 32 bits. When
7501 loading a value into a 32-bit register (but not an 8- or 16-bit
7502 register), the upper 32 bits of the corresponding 64-bit register are
7505 \H{reg64} Register Names in 64-bit Mode
7507 NASM uses the following names for general-purpose registers in 64-bit
7508 mode, for 8-, 16-, 32- and 64-bit references, respecitively:
7510 \c AL/AH, CL/CH, DL/DH, BL/BH, SPL, BPL, SIL, DIL, R8B-R15B
7511 \c AX, CX, DX, BX, SP, BP, SI, DI, R8W-R15W
7512 \c EAX, ECX, EDX, EBX, ESP, EBP, ESI, EDI, R8D-R15D
7513 \c RAX, RCX, RDX, RBX, RSP, RBP, RSI, RDI, R8-R15
7515 This is consistent with the AMD documentation and most other
7516 assemblers. The Intel documentation, however, uses the names
7517 \c{R8L-R15L} for 8-bit references to the higher registers. It is
7518 possible to use those names by definiting them as macros; similarly,
7519 if one wants to use numeric names for the low 8 registers, define them
7520 as macros. The standard macro package \c{altreg} (see \k{pkg_altreg})
7521 can be used for this purpose.
7523 \H{id64} Immediates and Displacements in 64-bit Mode
7525 In 64-bit mode, immediates and displacements are generally only 32
7526 bits wide. NASM will therefore truncate most displacements and
7527 immediates to 32 bits.
7529 The only instruction which takes a full \i{64-bit immediate} is:
7533 NASM will produce this instruction whenever the programmer uses
7534 \c{MOV} with an immediate into a 64-bit register. If this is not
7535 desirable, simply specify the equivalent 32-bit register, which will
7536 be automatically zero-extended by the processor, or specify the
7537 immediate as \c{DWORD}:
7539 \c mov rax,foo ; 64-bit immediate
7540 \c mov rax,qword foo ; (identical)
7541 \c mov eax,foo ; 32-bit immediate, zero-extended
7542 \c mov rax,dword foo ; 32-bit immediate, sign-extended
7544 The length of these instructions are 10, 5 and 7 bytes, respectively.
7546 The only instructions which take a full \I{64-bit displacement}64-bit
7547 \e{displacement} is loading or storing, using \c{MOV}, \c{AL}, \c{AX},
7548 \c{EAX} or \c{RAX} (but no other registers) to an absolute 64-bit address.
7549 Since this is a relatively rarely used instruction (64-bit code generally uses
7550 relative addressing), the programmer has to explicitly declare the
7551 displacement size as \c{QWORD}:
7555 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, sign-extended
7556 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, zero-extended
7557 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7561 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit relative disp
7562 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; d:o, address truncated to 32 bits(!)
7563 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; error
7564 \c mov eax,[abs qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7566 A sign-extended absolute displacement can access from -2 GB to +2 GB;
7567 a zero-extended absolute displacement can access from 0 to 4 GB.
7569 \H{unix64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Unix)
7571 On Unix, the 64-bit ABI is defined by the document:
7573 \W{http://www.nasm.us/links/unix64abi}\c{http://www.nasm.us/links/unix64abi}
7575 Although written for AT&T-syntax assembly, the concepts apply equally
7576 well for NASM-style assembly. What follows is a simplified summary.
7578 The first six integer arguments (from the left) are passed in \c{RDI},
7579 \c{RSI}, \c{RDX}, \c{RCX}, \c{R8}, and \c{R9}, in that order.
7580 Additional integer arguments are passed on the stack. These
7581 registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and \c{R11} are destroyed by function
7582 calls, and thus are available for use by the function without saving.
7584 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} and \c{RDX}, in that order.
7586 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7587 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM7};
7588 return is \c{XMM0} and \c{XMM1}. \c{long double} are passed on the
7589 stack, and returned in \c{ST0} and \c{ST1}.
7591 All SSE and x87 registers are destroyed by function calls.
7593 On 64-bit Unix, \c{long} is 64 bits.
7595 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted separately, so for the case of
7597 \c void foo(long a, double b, int c)
7599 \c{a} is passed in \c{RDI}, \c{b} in \c{XMM0}, and \c{c} in \c{ESI}.
7601 \H{win64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Win64)
7603 The Win64 ABI is described at:
7605 \W{http://www.nasm.us/links/win64abi}\c{http://www.nasm.us/links/win64abi}
7607 What follows is a simplified summary.
7609 The first four integer arguments are passed in \c{RCX}, \c{RDX},
7610 \c{R8} and \c{R9}, in that order. Additional integer arguments are
7611 passed on the stack. These registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and
7612 \c{R11} are destroyed by function calls, and thus are available for
7613 use by the function without saving.
7615 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} only.
7617 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7618 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM3};
7619 return is \c{XMM0} only.
7621 On Win64, \c{long} is 32 bits; \c{long long} or \c{_int64} is 64 bits.
7623 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted together, so for the case of
7625 \c void foo(long long a, double b, int c)
7627 \c{a} is passed in \c{RCX}, \c{b} in \c{XMM1}, and \c{c} in \c{R8D}.
7629 \C{trouble} Troubleshooting
7631 This chapter describes some of the common problems that users have
7632 been known to encounter with NASM, and answers them. It also gives
7633 instructions for reporting bugs in NASM if you find a difficulty
7634 that isn't listed here.
7637 \H{problems} Common Problems
7639 \S{inefficient} NASM Generates \i{Inefficient Code}
7641 We sometimes get `bug' reports about NASM generating inefficient, or
7642 even `wrong', code on instructions such as \c{ADD ESP,8}. This is a
7643 deliberate design feature, connected to predictability of output:
7644 NASM, on seeing \c{ADD ESP,8}, will generate the form of the
7645 instruction which leaves room for a 32-bit offset. You need to code
7646 \I\c{BYTE}\c{ADD ESP,BYTE 8} if you want the space-efficient form of
7647 the instruction. This isn't a bug, it's user error: if you prefer to
7648 have NASM produce the more efficient code automatically enable
7649 optimization with the \c{-O} option (see \k{opt-O}).
7652 \S{jmprange} My Jumps are Out of Range\I{out of range, jumps}
7654 Similarly, people complain that when they issue \i{conditional
7655 jumps} (which are \c{SHORT} by default) that try to jump too far,
7656 NASM reports `short jump out of range' instead of making the jumps
7659 This, again, is partly a predictability issue, but in fact has a
7660 more practical reason as well. NASM has no means of being told what
7661 type of processor the code it is generating will be run on; so it
7662 cannot decide for itself that it should generate \i\c{Jcc NEAR} type
7663 instructions, because it doesn't know that it's working for a 386 or
7664 above. Alternatively, it could replace the out-of-range short
7665 \c{JNE} instruction with a very short \c{JE} instruction that jumps
7666 over a \c{JMP NEAR}; this is a sensible solution for processors
7667 below a 386, but hardly efficient on processors which have good
7668 branch prediction \e{and} could have used \c{JNE NEAR} instead. So,
7669 once again, it's up to the user, not the assembler, to decide what
7670 instructions should be generated. See \k{opt-O}.
7673 \S{proborg} \i\c{ORG} Doesn't Work
7675 People writing \i{boot sector} programs in the \c{bin} format often
7676 complain that \c{ORG} doesn't work the way they'd like: in order to
7677 place the \c{0xAA55} signature word at the end of a 512-byte boot
7678 sector, people who are used to MASM tend to code
7682 \c ; some boot sector code
7687 This is not the intended use of the \c{ORG} directive in NASM, and
7688 will not work. The correct way to solve this problem in NASM is to
7689 use the \i\c{TIMES} directive, like this:
7693 \c ; some boot sector code
7695 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7698 The \c{TIMES} directive will insert exactly enough zero bytes into
7699 the output to move the assembly point up to 510. This method also
7700 has the advantage that if you accidentally fill your boot sector too
7701 full, NASM will catch the problem at assembly time and report it, so
7702 you won't end up with a boot sector that you have to disassemble to
7703 find out what's wrong with it.
7706 \S{probtimes} \i\c{TIMES} Doesn't Work
7708 The other common problem with the above code is people who write the
7713 by reasoning that \c{$} should be a pure number, just like 510, so
7714 the difference between them is also a pure number and can happily be
7717 NASM is a \e{modular} assembler: the various component parts are
7718 designed to be easily separable for re-use, so they don't exchange
7719 information unnecessarily. In consequence, the \c{bin} output
7720 format, even though it has been told by the \c{ORG} directive that
7721 the \c{.text} section should start at 0, does not pass that
7722 information back to the expression evaluator. So from the
7723 evaluator's point of view, \c{$} isn't a pure number: it's an offset
7724 from a section base. Therefore the difference between \c{$} and 510
7725 is also not a pure number, but involves a section base. Values
7726 involving section bases cannot be passed as arguments to \c{TIMES}.
7728 The solution, as in the previous section, is to code the \c{TIMES}
7731 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7733 in which \c{$} and \c{$$} are offsets from the same section base,
7734 and so their difference is a pure number. This will solve the
7735 problem and generate sensible code.
7738 \H{bugs} \i{Bugs}\I{reporting bugs}
7740 We have never yet released a version of NASM with any \e{known}
7741 bugs. That doesn't usually stop there being plenty we didn't know
7742 about, though. Any that you find should be reported firstly via the
7744 \W{http://www.nasm.us/}\c{http://www.nasm.us/}
7745 (click on "Bug Tracker"), or if that fails then through one of the
7746 contacts in \k{contact}.
7748 Please read \k{qstart} first, and don't report the bug if it's
7749 listed in there as a deliberate feature. (If you think the feature
7750 is badly thought out, feel free to send us reasons why you think it
7751 should be changed, but don't just send us mail saying `This is a
7752 bug' if the documentation says we did it on purpose.) Then read
7753 \k{problems}, and don't bother reporting the bug if it's listed
7756 If you do report a bug, \e{please} give us all of the following
7759 \b What operating system you're running NASM under. DOS, Linux,
7760 NetBSD, Win16, Win32, VMS (I'd be impressed), whatever.
7762 \b If you're running NASM under DOS or Win32, tell us whether you've
7763 compiled your own executable from the DOS source archive, or whether
7764 you were using the standard distribution binaries out of the
7765 archive. If you were using a locally built executable, try to
7766 reproduce the problem using one of the standard binaries, as this
7767 will make it easier for us to reproduce your problem prior to fixing
7770 \b Which version of NASM you're using, and exactly how you invoked
7771 it. Give us the precise command line, and the contents of the
7772 \c{NASMENV} environment variable if any.
7774 \b Which versions of any supplementary programs you're using, and
7775 how you invoked them. If the problem only becomes visible at link
7776 time, tell us what linker you're using, what version of it you've
7777 got, and the exact linker command line. If the problem involves
7778 linking against object files generated by a compiler, tell us what
7779 compiler, what version, and what command line or options you used.
7780 (If you're compiling in an IDE, please try to reproduce the problem
7781 with the command-line version of the compiler.)
7783 \b If at all possible, send us a NASM source file which exhibits the
7784 problem. If this causes copyright problems (e.g. you can only
7785 reproduce the bug in restricted-distribution code) then bear in mind
7786 the following two points: firstly, we guarantee that any source code
7787 sent to us for the purposes of debugging NASM will be used \e{only}
7788 for the purposes of debugging NASM, and that we will delete all our
7789 copies of it as soon as we have found and fixed the bug or bugs in
7790 question; and secondly, we would prefer \e{not} to be mailed large
7791 chunks of code anyway. The smaller the file, the better. A
7792 three-line sample file that does nothing useful \e{except}
7793 demonstrate the problem is much easier to work with than a
7794 fully fledged ten-thousand-line program. (Of course, some errors
7795 \e{do} only crop up in large files, so this may not be possible.)
7797 \b A description of what the problem actually \e{is}. `It doesn't
7798 work' is \e{not} a helpful description! Please describe exactly what
7799 is happening that shouldn't be, or what isn't happening that should.
7800 Examples might be: `NASM generates an error message saying Line 3
7801 for an error that's actually on Line 5'; `NASM generates an error
7802 message that I believe it shouldn't be generating at all'; `NASM
7803 fails to generate an error message that I believe it \e{should} be
7804 generating'; `the object file produced from this source code crashes
7805 my linker'; `the ninth byte of the output file is 66 and I think it
7806 should be 77 instead'.
7808 \b If you believe the output file from NASM to be faulty, send it to
7809 us. That allows us to determine whether our own copy of NASM
7810 generates the same file, or whether the problem is related to
7811 portability issues between our development platforms and yours. We
7812 can handle binary files mailed to us as MIME attachments, uuencoded,
7813 and even BinHex. Alternatively, we may be able to provide an FTP
7814 site you can upload the suspect files to; but mailing them is easier
7817 \b Any other information or data files that might be helpful. If,
7818 for example, the problem involves NASM failing to generate an object
7819 file while TASM can generate an equivalent file without trouble,
7820 then send us \e{both} object files, so we can see what TASM is doing
7821 differently from us.
7824 \A{ndisasm} \i{Ndisasm}
7826 The Netwide Disassembler, NDISASM
7828 \H{ndisintro} Introduction
7831 The Netwide Disassembler is a small companion program to the Netwide
7832 Assembler, NASM. It seemed a shame to have an x86 assembler,
7833 complete with a full instruction table, and not make as much use of
7834 it as possible, so here's a disassembler which shares the
7835 instruction table (and some other bits of code) with NASM.
7837 The Netwide Disassembler does nothing except to produce
7838 disassemblies of \e{binary} source files. NDISASM does not have any
7839 understanding of object file formats, like \c{objdump}, and it will
7840 not understand \c{DOS .EXE} files like \c{debug} will. It just
7844 \H{ndisstart} Getting Started: Installation
7846 See \k{install} for installation instructions. NDISASM, like NASM,
7847 has a \c{man page} which you may want to put somewhere useful, if you
7848 are on a Unix system.
7851 \H{ndisrun} Running NDISASM
7853 To disassemble a file, you will typically use a command of the form
7855 \c ndisasm -b {16|32|64} filename
7857 NDISASM can disassemble 16-, 32- or 64-bit code equally easily,
7858 provided of course that you remember to specify which it is to work
7859 with. If no \i\c{-b} switch is present, NDISASM works in 16-bit mode
7860 by default. The \i\c{-u} switch (for USE32) also invokes 32-bit mode.
7862 Two more command line options are \i\c{-r} which reports the version
7863 number of NDISASM you are running, and \i\c{-h} which gives a short
7864 summary of command line options.
7867 \S{ndiscom} COM Files: Specifying an Origin
7869 To disassemble a \c{DOS .COM} file correctly, a disassembler must assume
7870 that the first instruction in the file is loaded at address \c{0x100},
7871 rather than at zero. NDISASM, which assumes by default that any file
7872 you give it is loaded at zero, will therefore need to be informed of
7875 The \i\c{-o} option allows you to declare a different origin for the
7876 file you are disassembling. Its argument may be expressed in any of
7877 the NASM numeric formats: decimal by default, if it begins with `\c{$}'
7878 or `\c{0x}' or ends in `\c{H}' it's \c{hex}, if it ends in `\c{Q}' it's
7879 \c{octal}, and if it ends in `\c{B}' it's \c{binary}.
7881 Hence, to disassemble a \c{.COM} file:
7883 \c ndisasm -o100h filename.com
7888 \S{ndissync} Code Following Data: Synchronisation
7890 Suppose you are disassembling a file which contains some data which
7891 isn't machine code, and \e{then} contains some machine code. NDISASM
7892 will faithfully plough through the data section, producing machine
7893 instructions wherever it can (although most of them will look
7894 bizarre, and some may have unusual prefixes, e.g. `\c{FS OR AX,0x240A}'),
7895 and generating `DB' instructions ever so often if it's totally stumped.
7896 Then it will reach the code section.
7898 Supposing NDISASM has just finished generating a strange machine
7899 instruction from part of the data section, and its file position is
7900 now one byte \e{before} the beginning of the code section. It's
7901 entirely possible that another spurious instruction will get
7902 generated, starting with the final byte of the data section, and
7903 then the correct first instruction in the code section will not be
7904 seen because the starting point skipped over it. This isn't really
7907 To avoid this, you can specify a `\i\c{synchronisation}' point, or indeed
7908 as many synchronisation points as you like (although NDISASM can
7909 only handle 2147483647 sync points internally). The definition of a sync
7910 point is this: NDISASM guarantees to hit sync points exactly during
7911 disassembly. If it is thinking about generating an instruction which
7912 would cause it to jump over a sync point, it will discard that
7913 instruction and output a `\c{db}' instead. So it \e{will} start
7914 disassembly exactly from the sync point, and so you \e{will} see all
7915 the instructions in your code section.
7917 Sync points are specified using the \i\c{-s} option: they are measured
7918 in terms of the program origin, not the file position. So if you
7919 want to synchronize after 32 bytes of a \c{.COM} file, you would have to
7922 \c ndisasm -o100h -s120h file.com
7926 \c ndisasm -o100h -s20h file.com
7928 As stated above, you can specify multiple sync markers if you need
7929 to, just by repeating the \c{-s} option.
7932 \S{ndisisync} Mixed Code and Data: Automatic (Intelligent) Synchronisation
7935 Suppose you are disassembling the boot sector of a \c{DOS} floppy (maybe
7936 it has a virus, and you need to understand the virus so that you
7937 know what kinds of damage it might have done you). Typically, this
7938 will contain a \c{JMP} instruction, then some data, then the rest of the
7939 code. So there is a very good chance of NDISASM being \e{misaligned}
7940 when the data ends and the code begins. Hence a sync point is
7943 On the other hand, why should you have to specify the sync point
7944 manually? What you'd do in order to find where the sync point would
7945 be, surely, would be to read the \c{JMP} instruction, and then to use
7946 its target address as a sync point. So can NDISASM do that for you?
7948 The answer, of course, is yes: using either of the synonymous
7949 switches \i\c{-a} (for automatic sync) or \i\c{-i} (for intelligent
7950 sync) will enable \c{auto-sync} mode. Auto-sync mode automatically
7951 generates a sync point for any forward-referring PC-relative jump or
7952 call instruction that NDISASM encounters. (Since NDISASM is one-pass,
7953 if it encounters a PC-relative jump whose target has already been
7954 processed, there isn't much it can do about it...)
7956 Only PC-relative jumps are processed, since an absolute jump is
7957 either through a register (in which case NDISASM doesn't know what
7958 the register contains) or involves a segment address (in which case
7959 the target code isn't in the same segment that NDISASM is working
7960 in, and so the sync point can't be placed anywhere useful).
7962 For some kinds of file, this mechanism will automatically put sync
7963 points in all the right places, and save you from having to place
7964 any sync points manually. However, it should be stressed that
7965 auto-sync mode is \e{not} guaranteed to catch all the sync points, and
7966 you may still have to place some manually.
7968 Auto-sync mode doesn't prevent you from declaring manual sync
7969 points: it just adds automatically generated ones to the ones you
7970 provide. It's perfectly feasible to specify \c{-i} \e{and} some \c{-s}
7973 Another caveat with auto-sync mode is that if, by some unpleasant
7974 fluke, something in your data section should disassemble to a
7975 PC-relative call or jump instruction, NDISASM may obediently place a
7976 sync point in a totally random place, for example in the middle of
7977 one of the instructions in your code section. So you may end up with
7978 a wrong disassembly even if you use auto-sync. Again, there isn't
7979 much I can do about this. If you have problems, you'll have to use
7980 manual sync points, or use the \c{-k} option (documented below) to
7981 suppress disassembly of the data area.
7984 \S{ndisother} Other Options
7986 The \i\c{-e} option skips a header on the file, by ignoring the first N
7987 bytes. This means that the header is \e{not} counted towards the
7988 disassembly offset: if you give \c{-e10 -o10}, disassembly will start
7989 at byte 10 in the file, and this will be given offset 10, not 20.
7991 The \i\c{-k} option is provided with two comma-separated numeric
7992 arguments, the first of which is an assembly offset and the second
7993 is a number of bytes to skip. This \e{will} count the skipped bytes
7994 towards the assembly offset: its use is to suppress disassembly of a
7995 data section which wouldn't contain anything you wanted to see
7999 \H{ndisbugs} Bugs and Improvements
8001 There are no known bugs. However, any you find, with patches if
8002 possible, should be sent to
8003 \W{mailto:nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}\c{nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}, or to the
8005 \W{http://www.nasm.us/}\c{http://www.nasm.us/}
8006 and we'll try to fix them. Feel free to send contributions and
8007 new features as well.
8009 \A{inslist} \i{Instruction List}
8011 \H{inslistintro} Introduction
8013 The following sections show the instructions which NASM currently supports. For each
8014 instruction, there is a separate entry for each supported addressing mode. The third
8015 column shows the processor type in which the instruction was introduced and,
8016 when appropriate, one or more usage flags.
8020 \A{changelog} \i{NASM Version History}